OptiX OSN 550 Hardware Description (V100R006)

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service
Transmission System
V100R006C01
Hardware Description
Issue
02
Date
2013-01-18
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
CPE
Optical
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

Transmission System
About This Document
About This Document

Product Version
The following table lists the product versions applicable to this documentation.
Product Name
Product Version
OptiX OSN 550
V100R006C01
iManager U2000
V100R008C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the OptiX OSN 550 in terms of hardware architecture, boards,
cables.
This document is intended for:
Network planning engineers
Hardware installation engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium
level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that,
if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

ii

Transmission System
About This Document
Symbol
Description
Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or
supplement important points in the main text.
GUI Conventions
Convention
Meaning
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are

in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.
Updates in Issue 02 (2013-01-18) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

This document is the second issue for product version V100R006C01. Compared with issue
01 of product version V100R006C01, version 02 includes the following updates in
V100R006C01SPC100:
Added EF8F boards' support for FE electrical ports.
Added the number of supported line clock sources to SDH boards.

This document is the first issue for product version V100R006C01. Compared with issue 1 of
product version V100R006C00, this issue incorporates the following updates:
Added the 1x10GE Ethernet processing board EX1.
Added the 4xchannelized STM-1 service processing board CQ1.
Optimized the "Functions and Features" section of the system control, switching, and
timing board.
Optimized the "Functions and Features" sections of the packet processing boards.

This issue is used for first office application (FOA).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

iii

Transmission System
Contents
Contents
About This Document.................................................................................................................... ii
1 Chassis............................................................................................................................................. 1
2 Boards and Their Appearances................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Board List...........................................................................................................................................................5
2.2 Board Appearance............................................................................................................................................10
3 System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards...................................................................14

3.1 PCX..................................................................................................................................................................14
3.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................ 14
3.1.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................... 15
3.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................28
3.1.4 Front Panel..............................................................................................................................................31
3.1.5 DIP Switches and CF Card..................................................................................................................... 33
3.1.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................36
3.1.7 Feature Code...........................................................................................................................................37
3.1.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................... 38
3.2 CXL................................................................................................................................................................. 48
3.2.4 Front Panel..............................................................................................................................................53
3.2.5 DIP Switches and CF Card..................................................................................................................... 55
3.2.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................57
3.2.7 Feature Code...........................................................................................................................................57
4 Packet Processing Boards...........................................................................................................65

4.1 EF8F.................................................................................................................................................................65
4.1.4 Front Panel..............................................................................................................................................72
4.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers..................................................................................................................... 74
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

iv

Transmission System
Contents
4.1.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................74

4.1.7 Feature Code...........................................................................................................................................74
4.2 EM6T/EM6F....................................................................................................................................................77
4.2.4 Front Panel..............................................................................................................................................85
4.2.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers..................................................................................................................... 87
4.2.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................88
4.2.7 Feature Code...........................................................................................................................................88
4.3 EG4C............................................................................................................................................................... 94
4.3.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................101
4.3.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers................................................................................................................... 104
4.3.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................104
4.3.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................104
4.3.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................... 104
4.4 EX1................................................................................................................................................................ 110
4.4.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................110
4.4.2 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................... 110
4.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................114
4.4.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................116
4.4.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................117
4.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................. 117
4.4.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................117
4.5 MD1............................................................................................................................................................... 120
4.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................. 120
4.5.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................125
4.5.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................127
4.5.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................127
4.6 CQ1................................................................................................................................................................ 128
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)


Transmission System
Contents

4.6.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................133
4.6.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................135
4.6.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................135
5 SDH Boards................................................................................................................................ 138

5.1 SL1D.............................................................................................................................................................. 138
5.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................142
5.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................143
5.1.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................143
5.2 SL1Q.............................................................................................................................................................. 145
5.2.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................149
5.2.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................150
5.2.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................150
5.3 SL4D.............................................................................................................................................................. 153
5.3.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................157
5.3.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................158
5.3.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................158
6 PDH Boards................................................................................................................................ 162

6.1 SP3D.............................................................................................................................................................. 162
6.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................165
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

vi

Transmission System
Contents
6.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................168

6.1.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................168
6.2 PL3T.............................................................................................................................................................. 170
6.2.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................173
6.2.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................174
6.2.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................174
7 EoS Boards.................................................................................................................................. 175

7.1 EFS8...............................................................................................................................................................175
7.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................179
7.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................182
7.1.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................182
7.2 EGT1..............................................................................................................................................................183
7.2.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................186
7.2.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................187
7.2.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................187
8 WDM Board................................................................................................................................191
8.1 DMD2............................................................................................................................................................ 191
8.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................192
8.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................194
8.1.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................194
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

vii

Transmission System
Contents
9 Auxiliary Boards........................................................................................................................ 196

9.1 AUX............................................................................................................................................................... 196
9.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................198
9.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................202
9.1.7 Feature Code.........................................................................................................................................202
9.2 FAN................................................................................................................................................................204
9.2.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................206
9.2.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................207
10 Power Boards............................................................................................................................208
10.1 UPM.............................................................................................................................................................208
10.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................ 208
10.1.2 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................... 208
10.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................210
10.1.4 Front Panel..........................................................................................................................................210
10.1.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................212
10.1.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................... 213
10.2 PIU............................................................................................................................................................... 214
10.2.4 Front Panel..........................................................................................................................................216
10.2.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................217
10.3 APIU............................................................................................................................................................ 217
10.3.4 Front Panel..........................................................................................................................................219
10.3.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................220
11 Outdoor Cabinet...................................................................................................................... 222
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

viii

Transmission System
Contents
12 Filler Panel................................................................................................................................ 225

12.1 Functions......................................................................................................................................................225
12.2 Appearance and Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 225
13 Optical Attenuators.................................................................................................................227
14 Pluggable Optical Modules...................................................................................................229
14.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................229
14.2 SFP/eSFP Optical/Electrical Modules......................................................................................................... 231
14.3 XFP Optical Modules...................................................................................................................................235
14.4 CWDM/DWDM.......................................................................................................................................... 236
15 Pluggable electrical Modules................................................................................................249

16 Cables.........................................................................................................................................251
16.1 Fiber Jumper................................................................................................................................................ 252
16.2 DC Power Cable.......................................................................................................................................... 253
16.3 AC Power Cable...........................................................................................................................................254
16.4 UPM Power Cable....................................................................................................................................... 254
16.5 PGND Cable................................................................................................................................................ 256
16.6 STM-1 Cable................................................................................................................................................256
16.7 16xE1/T1 Cable........................................................................................................................................... 257
16.8 21xE1/T1 Cable........................................................................................................................................... 261
16.9 E3/T3 Cable................................................................................................................................................. 266
16.10 Network Cable........................................................................................................................................... 267
17 Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................271
A Glossary......................................................................................................................................272
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

ix

Transmission System
1 Chassis
Chassis
The OptiX OSN 550 is a 2U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on
several different types of cabinets and surfaces.
Chassis Structure
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)


Transmission System
1 Chassis
Chassis Structure and Board Installation Area
Board
installation
area
H
D
SLOT
SLOT
10
91 SLOT
(PIU) SLOT
(PIU)
11
93
SLOT (FAN)
SLOT
(FAN)
929
(PIU)
(PIU)
SLOT
7 (CST/CSH)
SLOT
7
SLOT
8 (CST/CSH)
SLOT
8
SLOT
5 (EXT)
SLOT
5 (EXT)
SLOT 66 (EXT)
SLOT
(EXT)
SLOT
3 (EXT)
SLOT
3 (EXT)
SLOT 4
4 (EXT)
SLOT
(EXT)
SLOT
1 (EXT
)
SLOT
1 (EXT)
SLOT 2
2 (EXT
)
SLOT
(EXT)
2
3
1 Power supply boards

2
Fan board
3
4
Extended boards
System control, switching,
and timing boards
An OptiX OSN 550 NE can automatically save its NE ID, extended ID, IP address, and subnet mask to
its backplane. After a new system control, switching, and timing board replaces an original one, the NE
automatically uses the saved information. Therefore, you do not need to set the NE ID, extended ID, IP
address, and subnet mask for the substitute board.
Installation Mode
The equipment can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of
cabinets and surfaces. such as in an ETSI or 19-inch cabinet, APM30H outdoor cabinet, or
open rack, or on a wall or desk.
Label Description
Table 1-1 provides the description of the labels on the chassis and boards. Actual labels may
vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)


Transmission System
1 Chassis
Table 1-1 Description of labels

Label
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
/ QUALIFICATION CARD
Label Name
Description
ESD protection label
Indicates that the equipment is

sensitive to static electricity.
Grounding label
Indicates the grounding position

of the chassis.
Fan warning label
Warns you not to touch fan

leaves when the fan is rotating.
Power caution label
Instructs you to read related

instructions before performing
any power-related tasks.
Laser safety class

label
The laser safety class label

CLASS 1 indicates that the
maximum optical power of the
optical port is less than 10 dBm
(10 mW).
Qualification card
label
Indicates that the equipment has

been quality checked.
RoHS label
Indicates that the equipment

contains certain hazardous
substances specified in the
RoHS directive. The equipment
needs to be recycled after the
environment-friendly use period
of 50 years expires.
Product nameplate
label
Indicates the product name and

certification.
HUAWEI
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
50
DC power
AC power
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)


Transmission System
1 Chassis
Technical Specifications
Table 1-2 lists the technical specifications of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis.
Table 1-2 Technical specifications of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (H x W x D)
Weight (empty chassis with a

backplane)
3.5 kg (net weight of a chassis that contains one fan board

and two PIU boards)
Power consumption
Maximum power consumption: 240 W
Typical power consumption: 149 W
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)


Transmission System
2 Boards and Their Appearances
Boards and Their Appearances
About This Chapter

This chapter lists the following types of boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports: system
control, switching, and timing boards, packet processing boards, SDH boards, PDH boards,
auxiliary boards, power supply boards, and fan boards. This chapter also provides the
appearances of these boards.
2.1
Board List
This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. The equipment provides
various functions with different boards inserted.
2.2
Board Appearance
This section describes the appearances, dimensions, and bar codes of boards.
2.1 Board List

This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. The equipment provides
various functions with different boards inserted.
Slot Layout
Figure 2-1 shows the slot layout in an OptiX OSN 550 NE.
Figure 2-1 Slot layout in an OptiX OSN 550 NE
Slot
91
10
Slot
(PIU SLO
(PIU) 93
T
)
11
SLO (FAN)
(FAN
Slot
T
)
9
92
(PIU)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Slot 7 (System control,

switching, and timing boards)
SLOT 5
Slot 5 (EXT)
(EXT)
SLOT 3
Slot 3 (EXT)
(EXT)
SLOT 1
)
Slot
(EXT1 (EXT)

Slot 8 (System control,

SLOT
8 (CST/CSH)
switching,
and
timing boards)
SLOT 6
Slot 6 (EXT)
(EXT)
SLOT 4
Slot 4 (EXT)
(EXT)
SLOT 2
Slot(EXT
2 (EXT) )

Transmission System
Board List
Table 2-1 lists the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Table 2-1 Boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acronym
Board Name
Port Type
System
control,
switching,
and timing
board
(Hybrid)
TNM1PCXLX
The cross-connect,
timing, system control,
and line board supports:
One Ethernet NM port/NM

serial port (sharing one RJ45
port)
A packet switching
capacity of 60 Gbit/s
A higher order
cross-connect
and a lower order
cross-connect
One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) optical/electrical port.
The optical port type can be
S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2.
STM-1 ports support SFP
electrical modules.
One 10GE and one

STM-N ports
System
communication and
control
One 10GE XFP optical port:

10GBASE-SR (LAN),
10GBASE-SW (WAN),
10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN),
10GBASE-ER (LAN),
10GBASE-EW (WAN),
10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
The cross-connect,

port)
A packet switching
A higher order
cross-connect
and a lower order
cross-connect
One 10GE port

10GBASE-SR (LAN),
10GBASE-SW (WAN),
10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN),
10GBASE-ER (LAN),
10GBASE-EW (WAN),
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
System
communication and
control
The cross-connect,

port)
A packet switching
A higher order
One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
(SFP) optical/electrical port.
TNM1PCXX
TNM1PCXLG
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Valid
Slot
Slots 7 and
8
Slots 7 and
8
Slots 7 and
8

Transmission System
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acronym
Board Name
Port Type
cross-connect
and a lower order
cross-connect
TNM1PCXGA
TNM1PCXGB
System
control,
switching,
and timing
board
TNM1CXL1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
One GE and one

STM-N ports
System
communication and
control
The optical port type can be

S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2.
electrical modules.
One GE SFP optical port:

1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/
1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
The cross-connect,

port)
A packet switching
A higher order
cross-connect
and a lower order
cross-connect

One GE port
System
communication and
control
The cross-connect,

port)
A packet switching
A higher order
cross-connect
and a lower order
cross-connect

One GE port
System
communication and
control

port)
One STM-1 SFP

optical/electrical port. The
The cross-connect,
A higher order
cross-connect
Valid
Slot

Slots 7 and
8
Slots 7 and
8
Slots 7 and
8

Transmission System
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acronym
Board Name
(TDM)
TNM1CXL4
and a lower order
cross-connect
System
communication and
control
TNM1CXL16
Packet
processing
board
Port Type
optical port type can be S-1.1,

L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports
support SFP electrical modules.

port)
One STM-4 SFP optical port of

the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type

port)
One STM-16 SFP optical port of

the S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2
type
TNM1MD1
32xsmart E1 service
processing board
75/120-ohm E1 port
TNM1EM6T
6xRJ45 FE/GE
processing board
Four FE electrical ports:

10/100BASE-T(X)
Two GE electrical ports (they

can serve as FE electrical ports):
1000BASE-T
Four FE electrical ports:

10/100BASE-T(X)
Two GE/FE SFP

optical/electrical ports:
1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/
1000Base-T/100BASE-BX/100
BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/100B
ASE-VX/100BASE-ZX
Four GE electrical ports:

1000BASE-T
Four GE/FE SFP optical ports:

1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/
100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/10
0BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100
BASE-ZX
Eight FE SFP optical/electrical

ports:
100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/10
0BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100
BASE-ZX/100BASE-T
TNM1EM6F
TNM1EG4C
TNM1EF8F
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
4xRJ45 and 2xSFP

FE/GE processing board
4xGE (SFP/RJ45)
processing board
8xFE processing board
Valid
Slot

Slots 7 and
8
Slots 7 and
8
Slots 1 to
6
Slots 1 to
6
Slots 1 to
6
Slots 3 to
6
Slots 1 to
6

Transmission System
Board
Classificat
ion
SDH board
PDH board
EoS board
WDM
board
Auxiliary
interface
Board
Acronym
Board Name
Port Type
Valid
Slot
TNM1EX1
1x10GE processing
board

10GBASE-SR (LAN),
10GBASE-SW (WAN),
10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN),
10GBASE-ER (LAN),
10GBASE-EW (WAN),
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 1 and
2 (An EX1
board
cannot
work with
a PCXGA
board.)
TNM1CQ1
4-port channelized
STM-1 service
processing board
Four STM-1 SFP

optical/electrical ports of the
S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical
type or of SFP electrical
modules
Slots 1 to
6
TNH2SL1D
2xSTM-1 interface board
Two STM-1 SFP optical/electrical

ports. The optical port type can be
S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports
Slots 1 to
6
TNH2SL1Q
Four STM-1 SFP optical/electrical

ports. The optical port type can be
S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports
Slots 1 to
6
TNH2SL4D
Two STM-4 SFP optical ports of

the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type
Slots 1 to
6
TNH2SP3D
42xE1/T1 tributary board
Forty-two 75/120-ohm E1 ports or

forty-two 100-ohm T1 ports
Slots 1 to
6
TNH2PL3T
3xE3/T3 tributary board
Three 75-ohm E3/T3 ports
Slots 1 to
6
TNH2EFS8
8xFE switching and

processing board
Eight FE electrical ports:

10/100BASE-T(X)
Slots 1 to
6
TNH2EGT1
1xGE transparent
transmission board
One GE SFP optical/electrical port:

1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/100
0BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/1000B
ase-T
Slots 1 to
6
TNM1DMD2
2-port optical add/drop

multiplexing board
wIN/wOUT
wA1/wA2
wD1/wD2
eIN/eOUT
eA1/eA2
eD1/eD2
One orderwire phone port
TNM1AUX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Auxiliary interface board

slot 1 to 6
Slots 1 to
6

Transmission System
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acronym
Board Name
board
Power
supply
board
Fan board
UPM
Uninterruptible power
module
Port Type
Valid
Slot
One asynchronous data port
One synchronous data port
6-input/2-output alarm port
One 2-channel external clock

port
Two 2-channel external time

ports
One 110 V/220 V AC power

input port
Two -48 V DC power output

ports
Slot 97
TND1PIU
Power supply board
One -48 V/-60 V DC power input

port
Slots 91
and 92
TNF1APIU
Power supply board
Two 110 V/220 V AC power input

ports
Slots 4
and 6
(recom
mende
d)
Slots 2
and 4
TNM1FAN
Fan board
N/A
Slot 93
2.2 Board Appearance

This section describes the appearances, dimensions, and bar codes of boards.
Appearances and Dimensions

Table 2-2 lists the appearances and dimensions of the boards that the OptiX OSN 550
supports.
Table 2-2 Appearances and dimensions of the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Board
Type
Board
Name
Appearance
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
System
control,
switching,
and timing
board
PCX/CXL
For example, PCXLX:
22.36 mm x 193.80
mm x 269.73 mm
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

10

Transmission System
Board
Type
Board
Name
Appearance
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Packet
processing
board
MD1/EM
6T/EM6F/
EG4C/EF
8F/EX1/C
Q1
For example, EM6F:
19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
SDH
board
SL1D/SL
4D/SL1Q
For example, SL1D:
19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
PDH
board
SP3D/PL
3T
For example, SP3D:
19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
EoS board
EFS8/EG
T1
For example, EFS8:
19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
WDM
board
DMD2
19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
Auxiliary
board
AUX
19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

11

Transmission System
Board
Type
Board
Name
Power
supply
board
UPM
Appearance
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
44.0 mm x 438.0
mm x 240.0 mm
GIE4805S
Fan board
PIU
41.4 mm x 21.0
mm x 229.9 mm
APIU
40.1 mm x 193.8
mm x 208.7 mm
FAN
86.2 mm x 28.5
mm x 217.6 mm
Note: The figure in the right cell shows the three dimensions. "H" and "W" indicate the
height and width of the front panel respectively and "D" indicates the depth of the printed
circuit board (PCB).
H
D
Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers
help you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board
bar code (as shown in Figure 2-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

12

Transmission System
Figure 2-2 Bar code

Bar code
020XES10AA800077-TNM1MD1 A
1
2
3
4
5
4 5
Last six digits of the part number

Internal code
Board version
Board name
Feature code
Only the bar codes of some boards contain feature codes, which further classify boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

13

Transmission System
3 System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards
System Control, Switching, and Timing

Boards
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 uses the system control, switching, and timing board PCX.
3.1
PCX
The PCX is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in Hybrid
mode. It is available in five types of finished boards.
3.2
CXL
The CXL is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in TDM mode.
3.1 PCX
The PCX is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in Hybrid
mode. It is available in five types of finished boards.
3.1.1 Version Description

The functional version of the PCX is TNM1. PCX boards are available in five types of
finished boards: PCXLX, PCXX, PCXLG, PCXGA, and PCXGB.
Table 3-1 lists the differences between the five types of PCX finished boards.
Table 3-1 Differences between the five types of PCX finished boards
Finished
Board
Packet
Switching
Capability
TDM Cross-Connect
Capability
TDM Service Port
Packet Service Port
PCXLX
60 Gbit/s
A higher order
cross-connect capacity
of 20 Gbit/s and a lower
order cross-connect
One
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
small form-factor
pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical port.
The optical port type can
One 10GE XFP optical

port: 10GBASE-SR
(LAN), 10GBASE-SW
(WAN), 10GBASE-LR
(LAN), 10GBASE-LW
(WAN), 10GBASE-ER
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

14

Transmission System
Finished
Board
Packet
Switching
Capability
TDM Cross-Connect
Capability
TDM Service Port
Packet Service Port
be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2,

S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,
S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2.
electrical modules.
(LAN), 10GBASE-EW
(WAN), 10GBASE-ZR
(LAN), or
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
PCXX
60 Gbit/s
None
One 10GE XFP optical

port: 10GBASE-SR
(LAN), 10GBASE-SW
(WAN), 10GBASE-LR
(LAN), 10GBASE-LW
(WAN), 10GBASE-ER
(LAN), 10GBASE-EW
(WAN), 10GBASE-ZR
(LAN), or
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
PCXLG
40 Gbit/s
One
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
small form-factor
pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical port.
The optical port type can
be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2,
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,
S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2.
electrical modules.
One GE SFP optical

port:
1000BASE-SX/1000BA
SE-LX/1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX
PCXGA
20 Gbit/s
None
One GE SFP optical

port:
1000BASE-SX/1000BA
SE-LX/1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX
PCXGB
40 Gbit/s
None
One GE SFP optical

port:
1000BASE-SX/1000BA
SE-LX/1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX
3.1.2 Functions and Features

This section describes the functions and features that the PCX supports.
System Control, Switching, and Timing Unit

Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the system control, switching, and timing unit of
the PCX supports.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

15

Transmission System
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the system control, switching, and timing unit of the PCX
supports
Function and Feature
Board
Basic
function
s
The PCXLX/PCXX supports 60 Gbit/s packet switching

function.
The PCXLG/PCXGB supports 40 Gbit/s packet switching

function.
The PCXGA supports 20 Gbit/s packet switching

function.
A higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a

lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
System control and

communication
Manages and controls the running status of an NE.
Works as a communication service unit between the

network management system (NMS) and NEs to help the
NMS to control and manage the NE.
Packet system
performance
See Table 3-4.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS)
functions
The packet switching unit of the PCX works with its service
interface unit or a service board to implement MPLS
functions.
Packet
switching
capability
Time division
multiplexing
(TDM)
cross-connect
capacity
Pseudo wire emulation

edge-to-edge (PWE3)
functions
Setup mode: static tunnels
Protection: 1:1 tunnel automatic protection switching

(APS)
Operation, administration and maintenance (OAM):

supports MPLS tunnel OAM and multiprotocol label
switching transfer profile (MPLS-TP) tunnel OAM.
MPLS tunnel OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and
MPLS-TP tunnel OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
interface unit or a service board to implement PWE3
functions.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Service categories
TDM PWE3 services (circuit emulation services

[CESs])
Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) PWE3 services
ETH PWE3 services
Setup mode: static pseudo wires (PWs)
Supports single-segment PWs (SS-PWs) and

multi-segment PWs (MS-PWs).
PW encapsulation mode: raw mode or tagged mode
PW control word: supported by the

PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB board whose printed circuit

16

Transmission System
Board
board (PCB) version is Ver.B and the PCXLX/PCXX
board.
Protection: 1:1 PW APS
OAM: supports MPLS PW OAM and MPLS-TP PW

OAM. MPLS PW OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711,
and MPLS-TP PW OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Equipment-level
protection
1+1 hot standby
Synchro
nization
The traced clock source at the physical layer can be any of the
following:
Clock/Time
source
External clock
Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) line clock
Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) tributary clock
Synchronous Ethernet clock
Internal clock source
The traced packet clock/time source can be any of the

following:
External time
IEEE 1588v2 clock and time
IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) clock
Standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol
Extended SSM protocol
Best master clock (BMC) protocol
Mode 1: 32 data communications channels (DCCs) that

are composed of D1-D3 bytes
Mode 2: 12 DCCs that are composed of D1-D3 bytes or

six DCCs that are composed of D4-D12 bytes
Inband DCN
Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN bandwidth

is configurable.
Huawei
Embedded
Control
Channel
(HWECC)
protocol
Supported by outband and inband DCNs
IP
Supported by outband and inband DCNs
Open systems
interconnectio
n (OSI) over
DCC protocol
Supported only by outband DCNs
Simple
Network
Supported
Clock protocol
Data
commun
ication
network
(DCN)
Network
manage
ment
protocol
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Outband DCN

17

Transmission System
Board
Management
Protocol
(SNMP)
Auxiliary and
management ports
Provides one 10M/100M Ethernet NMS port or NMS serial

port.
Packet Processing Unit and SDH Line Unit

Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the packet processing unit and SDH line unit of
the PCX support. The packet processing unit includes logical units PEX1 and PEG1, and the
SDH line unit includes logical units SL16S, SL4S, and SL1S. For the mapping between the
logical units and logical slots, see 3.1.6 Valid Slots.
Table 3-3 Functions and features that the packet processing unit and SDH line unit of the PCX
support
Board
Basic functions
PCXLX: receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals

and 1xSTM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signals.
PCXX: receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals.
PCXLG: receives/transmits and processes 1xGE signals

and 1xSTM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signals.
PCXGA/PCXGB: receives/transmits and processes 1xGE

signals.
PCXLX/PCXLG: One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 small

form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical port. The
optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. STM-1 ports support
SFP electrical modules.
PCXX/PCXGB/PCXGA: none
An optical port can be a colored coarse wavelength

division multiplexing (CWDM) optical port or a colored
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) optical
port. A colored CWDM optical port supports a
transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km. A colored
DWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of
120 km.
The following types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)

modules are supported:
Port
specifica
tions
TDM service
port
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional

pluggable optical module
STM-1/STM-4 single-fiber bidirectional pluggable

optical module
STM-1 pluggable electrical module
NOTE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

18

Transmission System
Board
Only an STM-16 optical port can be a colored DWDM optical port.
Packet service
port
Port
attribute
s
Packet
services
PCXLX/PCXX: One 10GE XFP optical port:

10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN),
10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN),
10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN),
10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
PCXLG/PCXGB/PCXGA: One GE SFP optical port:

1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BAS
E-ZX
A 10GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port

or a colored DWDM optical port. A colored CWDM
optical port supports a transmission distance of 70 km. A
colored DWDM optical port supports a transmission
distance of 40 km or 80 km.
A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port. A

colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission
The following types of SFP modules are supported:

GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
The XFP module supported is a 10GE two-fiber

bidirectional pluggable optical module.
The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and

auto-negotiation.
The 10GE optical port supports 10G full-duplex and the

setting of LAN mode or WAN mode.
TAG attributes
The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or

hybrid.
Traffic control
at ports
Supports the port-based traffic control function that

complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Port type
query
Supported
Query and
setting of
optical power
thresholds
Supported
E-Line
services
Working mode
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Native ETH services:
E-Line services based on point-to-point transparent

transmission
E-Line services based on virtual local area networks

(VLANs)
E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ)
ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)

services: E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS

19

Transmission System
Board
services)
E-LAN
services
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by PWs

(virtual private LAN services [VPLSs])
MAC address learning modes:
Independent VLAN learning (IVL) and shared VLAN

learning (SVL) for native Ethernet services
SVL for VPLS services
Ethernet data
frame format
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet II
Jumbo frame
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600

bytes.
MTU
Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes being
the default value.
SDH service functions (for

PCXLX/PCXLG boards)
Processes VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services, VC-4-4c services

(supported by STM-4/STM-16 service ports), and VC-4-16c
services (supported by STM-16 service ports).
Packet
protectio
n
schemes
Tunnel APS
Supports 1:1 tunnel APS.
PW APS
Supports 1:1 PW APS.
MPLS-TP ring
protection
switching
(MRPS)
Does not support MRPS.
MSTP
Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides
the same functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP).
ERPS
Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
LAG
Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static

aggregation
Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load sharing
TDM
protectio
n
schemes
(for
PCXLX/
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
LPT
Point-point and point-multipoint LPT.
Sub-network
connection
protection
(SNCP)
Supports SNCP at the VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 levels.
Ring multiplex
Supports ring MSP at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 levels.

20

Transmission System

PCXLG
boards)
Board
section
protection
(MSP)
Linear MSP
Quality of service (QoS)

functions
Supports linear MSP at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 levels.

interface unit or a service board to implement QoS functions.
DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB
service classes for service flows based on their QoS
information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities,
DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.
Complex traffic classification

Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN
IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by
packets, and V-UNI ingress policies.
QoS policies
Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies.
Access control list (ACL) policy

Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules
specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy.
CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and
V-UNI ingresses.
Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress,
prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
Congestion management
Supports tail drop and WRED dropping.
Queue scheduling policies

Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.
Mainten
ance
features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
MPLS/MPLSTP OAM
Tunnel OAM and PW OAM are supported.
MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification (CV), fast

failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication (BDI),
forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests
in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs), remote

defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal (AIS)
insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW
loss measurement (LM), locked signal function (LCK),
test (TST) (only packet loss test supported), PW Client
Signal Fail (CSF) indication, and two-way delay
measurement (DM) in compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1.

21

Transmission System

ETH OAM
Board
Ethernet service OAM:
Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion in

compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM with

reference to ITU-T Y.7131.
Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link

performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and selfloop
checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Warm reset and cold reset

Board power consumption query
Board temperature detection
Board voltage detection
Port mirroring
Synchro
nization
Supports local port mirroring.
Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI port.
Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and

NNI ports.
Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the

ingress direction of a UNI port.
SDH clock
source
Transmits SDH line clock signals at one port.
Synchronous
Ethernet
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at one port.
IEEE 1588v2
Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at one port.
IEEE 1588
ACR
Transmits 1588 ACR clock signals at one port.
DCN
Internet Group
Management Protocol
(IGMP) snooping
NOTE
Ports working in 10GE WAN mode do not support IEEE 1588v2 or
IEEE 1588 ACR.
Each TDM port supports one embedded control channel

(ECC).
Each GE/10GE port supports one inband DCN channel.
Supported
For the packet processing unit, the SDH line unit, and the logical unit that consists of the system control
and communication unit, cross-connect unit, and clock unit on a PCX board, switching of services
carried on any of the three units does not cause switching of services carried on the other two units.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

22

Transmission System
Packet System Performance Specifications

Table 3-4 lists the packet system performance specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 3-4 Packet system performance specifications
It
e
m
Specifications
Pr
ot
ec
tio
n
MPLS/MP
LS-TP
tunnel
automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
64
MPLS/MP
LS-TP PW
APS
Number of MPLS/MPLS-TP PW
APS protection groups
64
Number of bound members
512
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
NOTE
MPLS tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP PW
APS share resources.
NOTE
MPLS tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS,
MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP
PW APS share resources.
Link-state
pass
through
(LPT)
16
Link
aggregatio
n group
(LAG)
Number of LAGs
16
Number of members in a LAG
Multiple
Spanning
Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)
Number of instances supported by

a port
Number of port groups
Number of ports provided by port

groups
16
Ethernet
ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
Linear
multiplex
section
protection
(LMSP)
on the
packet

23

Transmission System
It
e
m
Specifications
plane
M
ai
nt
en
an
ce
MPLS/MP
LS-TP
tunnel
OAM
128
MPLS/MP
LS-TP PW
OAM
128
ETH
OAM
Number of maintenance domains (MDs)
64
Number of maintenance associations (MAs)
64
Number of maintenance association end

points (MEPs)
64
Number of maintenance association

intermediate points (MIPs)
64
(MPLS/M
PLS-TP
tunnel
OAM,
MPLS/MP
LS-TP PW
OAM, and
ETH
OAM
share
resources.)
Se
rv
ic
es
NOTE
MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW
OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.
NOTE
MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW
OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.
ATM
OAM
Number of local services: 128
Number of remote services: 256
E-Line
services
1K
E-LAN
services
Number of E-LAN services (E-LAN VSIs)

supported by an NE (VSI is short for virtual
switch instance.)
NOTE
Native ETH services and PWE3 ETH services (VPWSs) share resources.
Native ETH
services: 1
PWE3 ETH services

(VPLSs): 128
NOTE
Native ETH services and
PWE3 ETH services
(VPLSs) cannot coexist
on the same NE.
Number of logical ports supported by a VSI
Number of virtual user-network interfaces

(V-UNIs) supported by an NE (VPLS)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Native ETH
services: 1K
PWE3 ETH services

(VPLSs): 128
Number
of
V-UNIs
Number of
VLANs
24

Transmission System
It
e
m
Specifications
Number of split horizon groups supported by

a VSI
Number of logical ports supported by an NE

CES
services
256
ATM
services
Number of local services
128
Number of remote services
256
M
ult
iLi
nk
Po
int
-t
oPo
int
Pr
ot
oc
ol
(
M
LP
P
P)
Number of
ML-PPP
groups
supported
by an NE
64
Number of
PPP links
supported
by an NE
504
Number of
member
links
supported
in an
ML-PPP
group
16
IG
M
P
sn
oo
pi
Number of
multicast
groups
512
Number of
members
1K
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

32
4096
64
2047
128
1023
256
511
512
255
1024
127
Native ETH
services: 1
PWE3 ETH services

(VPLSs): 3
1K
25

Transmission System
It
e
m
Specifications
ng
in a
multicast
group
Q
oS
Number of
port
weighted
random
early
discard
(WRED)
policies
Number of
virtual
user-netwo
rk
interface
(V-UNI)
ingress
policies
256
Number of
port
policies
256
Number of
Differentia
ted
Services
(DiffServ)
domains
Number of
port flows
512
Number of
V-UNI
ingress
flows
512
Number of
traffic
classificati
on rules
Number of
access
control
lists
(ACLs)
512
Number of
MPLS
Ot
he
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Unidirectional: 1K

26

Transmission System
It
e
m
Specifications
rs
tunnels
Bidirectional: 512
NOTE
One bidirectional MPLS tunnel is counted as two unidirectional MPLS tunnels.
If MPLS tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and MPLS tunnels must
not exceed 1K. If MPLS tunnels carry PWs, the MPLS tunnels are not counted
and the number of carried PWs must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each MPLS
tunnel carries one PW, the number of MPLS tunnels and the number of PWs
can both be 1K.
Tunnel
bandwidth
10 Gbit/s
Number of
static PWs
1K
PW
bandwidth
10 Gbit/s
Number of
MS-PWs
128
Number of
QinQ links
1K
MAC
addresses
Number of static MAC

addresses supported by an
E-LAN
512
Number of MAC addresses

supported by E-LAN services
16K
Number of MAC addresses

supported by an NE
16K
VLAN ID
range
supported
by a port
NOTE
If MPLS tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and MPLS tunnels must not
exceed 1K. If MPLS tunnels carry PWs, the MPLS tunnels are not counted and
the number of carried PWs must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each MPLS tunnel
carries one PW, the number of MPLS tunnels and the number of PWs can both be
1K.
1 to 4094
The values listed in the preceding table are the maximum values supported by the OSN equipment.
The packet performance counters supported by the packet processing boards (including PEX1 and PEG1)
are the same those supported by the OSN equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

27

Transmission System
3.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The PCX consists of a system control and communication unit, a packet switching unit, a
packet processing unit, a TDM cross-connect unit, a SDH line unit, a clock unit, and a power
supply unit.
Function Block Diagram

Figure 3-2 Function block diagram of the PCX
Backplane
STM-1/4/16 signal
GE/10GE signal
TDM service
TDM crossconnect unit
SDH line unit
Packet
processing unit
Packet
service
Packet
switching unit
GE/10GE
signal
Service board
Service board
Control bus
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
System control and

communication unit
Clock signal received

from other boards
Clock unit
Clock signal
received from
the service unit
on the board
Power supplied to the other

units on the board
Power
supply
unit
Fuse
Clock signal provided

to other boards
Clock signal
provided to the
other units on
the board
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
System power supply

System power supply
+3.3 V power supplied to other boards
+12 V power supplied to fans
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit.
The system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
The CPU unit performs the following control functions using the control bus:
Manages other boards and the other units on the PCX, and collects alarms and performance events.
Implements software loading by reading information from the CF card.
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and
enables FPGA loading.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

28

Transmission System
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
The system control and communication unit on a PCX board communicates with the
system control and communication unit on the standby PCX board by carrying FE
signals over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, the active and
standby PCX boards form a 1+1 hot backup relationship.
Packet Switching Unit

The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for packet services.
After receiving services from a packet service board, the packet switching unit grooms
the services based on the configurations delivered by the system control and
communication unit.
After receiving protocol packets from a packet service board, the packet switching unit
transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for
processing. After processing, the system control and communication unit sends the
protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits
the protocol packets to the packet service board.
TDM Cross-Connect Unit

The TDM cross-connect unit grooms TDM services over the entire system using the higher
order cross-connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-2 shows the
function block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-3 Function block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
Higher
order crossconnect
module
HOXC
Sink TDM
service unit
Lower order
crossconnect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect
module over cross-connect buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher
order cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the
sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

29

Transmission System
cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect
module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and
then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order
cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM
service unit.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from service clock sources at service
ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked
loop, the clock unit provides the system clock to other units on the PCX and other
boards.
The clock unit receives IEEE 1588v2 messages and IEEE 1588 ACR messages from the
GE/10GE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time
synchronization.
The clock unit supports synchronous Ethernet clock.
The clock units on the active and standby PCX boards transmit clock signals to each
other.
Packet Processing Unit

The packet processing unit receives/transmits and processes 1xGE/10GE optical signals.
In the receive direction:
After performing optical-to-electrical (O/E) conversion, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for
GE/10GE optical signals, the GE/10GE signal processing unit extracts framed GE/10GE signals by
delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE/10GE signal processing unit also performs cyclic
redundancy checks (CRCs).
The GE/10GE signal processing unit works with the packet switching unit to process VLAN tags in
Ethernet data frames, process labels in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation
edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets, perform quality of service (QoS) processing such as traffic classification and
committed access rate (CAR) restriction for Ethernet data frames, and process operation, administration
and maintenance (OAM) packets and protocol packets.
In the transmit direction:
The GE/10GE signal processing unit works with the packet switching unit to process VLAN tags in
Ethernet data frames, process labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets, perform QoS processing such as traffic
shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames, and process OAM packets and protocol packets.
After delimiting frames, adding preambles, and calculating CRC codes, the GE/10GE signal processing
unit performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding and then transmits GE/10GE signals to the GE/10GE
optical port after performing electrical-to-optical (E/O) conversion.
SDH Line Unit

The SDH line unit performs the following functions: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signal receiving,
serial/parallel conversion, clock signal extraction, data restoration, overhead processing, alarm
monitoring/reporting, signal inloops/outloops, MSP, and ALS functions.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Combines two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the
power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board.
30

Transmission System
Combines two -48 V/-60 V power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the
+3.3 V power supply required by other boards.
Combines two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the
+12 V power supply required by fans.
3.1.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, buttons, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Table 3-5 shows the front panel of each PCX finished board.
Table 3-5 Front panel of each PCX finished board
Finish
ed
Board
PCXL
X
PCXX
Front Panel Diagram
X
C T G C
O N V T S
P A
T R Y R C O
S P S S A L
X
C T G C
O N V T
P A
T R Y R C
S P S S A
PCXL
Ga
PCXG
A
PCXG
B
X
C T G C
O N V T S
P A
T R Y R C O
S
S A L
P S
X
C T G C
A O N V T
P T
R Y R C
S P S S A
X
C T G C
O N V T
P A
T R Y R C
S P S S A
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
/A
L
RST
TX/RX
TX / RX
NMS 1/COM
EXT
TX / RX
NMS 1/COM
EXT
NMS 1/COM
EXT
TX/RX
NMS 1/COM
EXT
TX/RX
NMS 1/COM
EXT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
/A
L
RST
STM T/R
GE T/R
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
/A
L
RST
A
/
L
RST
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
A
/
L
RST
a: There are two types of front panels for the PCXLG, which differ only in silkscreen
information. The front panel described in this section is of a later version.
Indicators
The front panel of the PCX has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, ACT,
LOS, and L/A. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

31

Transmission System
Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports

Table 3-6 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports
Port
Descript
ion
NMS/
COM
Ethernet
NM
port/NM
serial port
Connector Type
RJ45
Pin Assignment
Pin 1: transmitting data (+)
Pin 2: transmitting data (-)
Pin 3: receiving data (+)
Pin 4: grounding end of the

NM serial port
Pin 5: receive end of the

NM serial port
Pin 6: receiving data (-)
Pin 7: not defined
Pin 8: transmit end of the

NM serial port
87654321
For status
explanation for the
indicators of an
RJ45 port, see
Table 3-5.
EXT
Reserved
Required
Cable
16.10
Network
Cable
Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on an Ethernet port

Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The Ethernet link is working

properly.
Off
The Ethernet link is interrupted.
On or blinking
The port is receiving or transmitting

data.
Off
The port is not receiving or

transmitting data.
ACT (yellow)
Service Ports
Table 3-8 Description of the service ports on the PCX
Boar
d
Port
Descr
iption
PCX
LX/P
CXX
TX/R
X
10GE
optical
port
PCX
LG
GE
T/R
GE
optical
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Connector Type
Pin
Assignment
Required
Cable
10GE optical port:

LC XFP optical
module
TX represents
the transmit
port.
SFP optical port:

16.1 Fiber
Jumper
GE/STM-1/4/16
optical port: LC SFP
RX represents
the receive
SFP electrical
port: 16.6 STM-1

32

Transmission System
Boar
d
Port
Descr
iption
PCX
GA/P
CXG
B
TX/R
X
port
PCX
LX
TX/R
X
PCX
LG
STM
T/R
STM1/4/16
optical
/electri
cal
port
Connector Type
Pin
Assignment
optical module
TX
port.
Required
Cable
Cable
RX
STM-1 electrical
port: SFP electrical
module
TX
RX
Buttons
Table 3-9 Buttons
Button
Name
Description
RST
Warm reset button
After this button is pressed, a warm

reset is performed on the board.
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum launched optical power of
the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.1.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
CF Card
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. To synchronize the NE databases, system
parameters, and NE logs on the PCX board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the PCX board during package
diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize
software packages on the PCX board and the CF card. If the active system control, switching, and timing
board and the CF card have different software packages, the associated NE reports an
SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm if it restarts after a power failure.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

33

Transmission System
Positions of the DIP Switches and CF Card
1
2
ON
DIP
3
1 2 3 4
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
3. Daughter board
Meanings of DIP Switch Settings

Setting of DIP Switchesa
Meaning
Indicates that
the board works
with the
watchdog
enabled.
The value is
reserved.
Indicates that
the board is
being
debugged.
Indicates that
the board is
being
debugged.
Indicates that
the board works
with the
watchdog
disabled and a
full memory
check is
running.

34
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Transmission System
Meaning
Indicates the
BIOS holdover
state.
Indicates the
BIOS
exhibition state.
The value is
reserved. (By
default, this
value indicates
that the board
works with the
watchdog
enabled.)
The value is
reserved. (By
default, this
value indicates
that the board
works with the
watchdog
enabled.)
Restores the
data of the CF
card.
Erases data in
the system
parameter area.
Erases
databases.
Erases NE
software,
including
patches.
Erases
databases and
NE software
(including
patches).
Erases all data

in the file
system.
Erases all the

data except for
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

35

Transmission System

4
Meaning
1
the board
manufacturing
information and
basic BIOS
data. That is, all
data in the file
system,
extended BIOS
area, and
system
parameter area
is erased.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.1.6 Valid Slots

The PCX can be inserted in slot 7 (preferred) or slot 8 in the chassis.
Figure 3-3 shows the mapping between physical slots and their logical slots. Physical slot 7
has the following logical slots on the NMS: slot 7, slot 9, slot 81, slot 83, and slot 85; physical
slot 8 has the following logical slots on the NMS: slot 8, slot 10, slot 82, slot 84, and slot 86.
Figure 3-4 Logical slots for a PCX board
Slot
Slot 7
91
10
Slot
(PIU SLO
(PIU) 93
T
)
11
SLO (FAN
Slot (FAN)
T
)
9
92
(PIU)
Slot 817
Slot 85
Slot 82
SLOT
Slot 83
Slot 8 SLOT
Slot 108 (CST/CSH)
Slot 84
(SCC)
(STG)
(SCC)
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 6
SLOT 5
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 5 (EXT)
(EXT)
(EXT)
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
(EXT)
(EXT)
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
)
Slot
Slot(EXT
2 (EXT) )
(EXT1 (EXT)
Slot 9
Slot 86
(STG)
The board that can be created in a logical slot varies according to the manufactured board that
is installed in a physical slot. Table 3-10 provides the mapping between manufactured boards
and their logical boards.
Table 3-10 Mapping between manufactured boards and their logical boards
Manufact
ured
Board
Logical
Slot 7/8
Logical
Slot 9/10
Logical
Slot 81/82
Logical Slot
83/84
Logical Slot
85/86
PCXLX
SL16S/SL4S
/SL1S
PEX1
SCC
PUXC
STG
PCXX
PEX1
SCC
PUXC
STG
PCXLG
SL16S/SL4S
PEG1
SCC
PEXC
STG
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

36

Transmission System
Manufact
ured
Board
Logical
Slot 7/8
Logical
Slot 9/10
Logical
Slot 81/82
Logical Slot
83/84
Logical Slot
85/86
/SL1S
PCXGB
PEG1
SCC
PEXC
STG
PCXGA
PEG1
SCC
PGXC
STG
3.1.7 Feature Code

The feature code of a board refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code and
indicates the type of optical port. PCX boards have feature codes.
Table 3-11 Feature codes of the PCX
Feature Code
Port Type
TNM1PCXLG1604
1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.2, LC)
TNM1PCXLG404
TNM1PCXLX1604
1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.2, LC)
TNM1PCXLX404
TNM1PCXLG406
1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single

Fibre Bidirectional, TX 1490nm)
TNM1PCXLG405
1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single

TNM1PCXLX406
1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single

TNM1PCXLX405
1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single

TNM1PCXLG1603
TNM1PCXLG1602
TNM1PCXLG1601
1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, S-16.1, LC)
TNM1PCXLG402
TNM1PCXLG401
1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, S-4.1, LC)
TNM1PCXLX1603
TNM1PCXLX1602
TNM1PCXLX1601
1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, S-16.1, LC)
TNM1PCXLX402
TNM1PCXLX401
1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, S-4.1, LC)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

37

Transmission System
3.1.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions,
weight, and power consumption.
Table 3-12 lists the technical specifications of the PCX.
Table 3-12 Technical specifications of the PCX
Item
Performance
Auxiliar
y ports
and
manage
ment
ports
NMS/C
OM
Ethernet NM port/NM
serial port
Not involved
EXT
Reserved
Not involved
Service
ports
TX/RX
(PCXL
X/PCX
X)
10GE optical port
See Table 3-13, Table 3-24, and Table

3-25.
TX/RX
(PCXL
G/PCX
GA/PC
XGB)
GE optical port
See Table 3-14, Table 3-15, Table

3-23, and Table 3-16.
TX/RX
(PCXL
X/PCX
LG)
STM-1/4/16
optical/electrical port
See Table 3-18, Table 3-19, Table

3-20, Table 3-21, Table 3-26, Table
3-27, Table 3-17, and Table 3-22.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm
Weight
0.80 kg
Power consumption
PCXLX: 45 W
PCXX: 44.5 W
PCXLG: 37 W
PCXGA/PCXGB: 36.5 W
Table 3-13 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's 10GE optical ports
Item
Value
Optical port
type
10GBASE-SR
(LAN)/10GBAS
E-SW (WAN)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
10GBASE-LR
(LAN)/10GBAS
E-LW (WAN)
10GBASE-ER
(LAN)/10GBAS
E-EW (WAN)

10GBASE-ZR
(LAN)/10GBAS
E-ZW (WAN)
38

Transmission System
Item
Value
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
0.3
10
40
80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
840 to 860
1260 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-1.3 to -7.3
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to 4
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-7.5
-11
-15
-24
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1
0.5
-1
-7
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
Table 3-14 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports

Item
Value
Optical port
type
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
1000BASE-ZX
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5
10
40
80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17
-20
-23
-23
Minimum
-3
-3
-3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

39

Transmission System
Item
Value
overload
(dBm)
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
Table 3-15 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Paramete
r
Value
Type of
optical
interface
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
10
40
Type of
fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490
1310
1490
1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310
1490
1310
1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5
-23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

40

Transmission System
Table 3-16 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
1488095.00
9.00
0.00
7440475.00
128.00
844595.00
11.80
0.00
4222975.00
256.00
452899.00
17.30
0.00
2264495.00
512.00
234962.00
25.00
0.00
1174810.00
1024.00
119732.00
29.20
0.00
598660.00
1280.00
96154.00
31.30
0.00
480770.00
1518.00
81274.00
33.40
0.00
406370.00
2000.00
61881.00
37.40
0.00
309405.00
9600.00
12994.00
98.00
0.00
64970.00
Table 3-17 Specifications of STM-1 electrical ports

Item
Value
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Code pattern
CMI
Connector
SAA straight female
Signal bit rate at the output port
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Permitted frequency deviation at the

input port
Allowed attenuation at the input port
Input jitter tolerance
Table 3-18 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Transmission distance
(km)
15
40
80
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

41

Transmission System
Item
Value
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical power

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
-10
Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)
8.2
10
10
NOTE
Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type
Explanation for optical port type "S-1.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "1"
represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm).
Explanation for optical port type "L-1.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1"
Table 3-19 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
550's STM-1 optical ports
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1
L-1.1
(km)
15
40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

42

Transmission System
Parameter
Value
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
10
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
15
40
80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
(dBm)
-28
-28
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-8
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
NOTE
Paramete
r
Value
Nominal
622080 kbit/s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

43

Transmission System
Paramete
r
Value
bit rate
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Type of
optical
interface
S-4.1
L-4.1
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
15
40
Type of
fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490
1310
1490
1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310
1490
1310
1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5
-23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-16.1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
L-16.1

L-16.2
44

Transmission System
Item
Value
Transmission
distance (km)
15
40
80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-5 to 0
-2 to +3
-2 to +3
(dBm)
-18
-27
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-9
-9
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
NOTE
Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits
"16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm).
Explanation for optical port type "L-16.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits
Table 3-23 Parameters specified for colored GE optical ports (CWDM)

Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
1,250,000 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
40
80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5
0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of

20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
-19
-28

45

Transmission System
Parameter
Value
CWDM
(dBm)
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
-3
-9
8.2
8.2
Table 3-24 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s
WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
70

range (dBm)
0 to 4
range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23
1571 nm: -22
1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21
Minimum overload (dBm)
-9

(dB)
8.2
Table 3-25 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission
40
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
80

46

Transmission System
Parameter
Value
DWDM
distance (km)
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-1 to +2
-1 to +3
Central frequency
(THz)
192.1 to 196.0
192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10
10
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-24
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1
-9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
9.5
8.2
Table 3-26 Parameters specified for colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
155,520 kbit/s (STM-1), 622,080 kbit/s (STM-4), 2,488,320 kbit/s

(STM-16)
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
40
80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5
0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)

20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
-28
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-9
Minimum
8.2
8.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

47

Transmission System
Parameter
Value
CWDM
extinction ratio
(dB)
Table 3-27 Parameters specified for colored STM-16 optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
2,488,320 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
(km)
120

range (dBm)
-1 to +3
Central frequency (THz)
192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10
(dBm)
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-9

(dB)
8.2
3.2 CXL
The CXL is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in TDM mode.

The functional version of CXL boards is TNM1. Depending on the rates of line units, CXL
boards are available in three types: TNM1CXL1, TNM1CXL4, and TNM1CXL16.
Table 3-28 describes the versions of the CXL.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

48

Transmission System
Table 3-28 Versions of the CXL

Board Type
Available Port
Type of Optical Port
TNM1CXL1
1xSTM-1 optical/electrical
port
Optical port: S-1.1, L-1.1,

L-1.2
Electrical port: SFP
electrical port
TNM1CXL4
1xSTM-4 optical port
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2
TNM1CXL16
1xSTM-16 optical port
S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2

The CXL has a system control and communication unit, a cross-connect unit, a clock unit, and
an STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 line unit.
Table 3-29 lists the functions and features that the CXL supports.
Table 3-29 Functions and features that the CXL supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Cross-connection
functions
Provides a higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s

and a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s.
Supports cross-connections at the VC-4, VC-3, VC-12,

VC-4-4c, and VC-4-16c levels, and achieves service
grooming between lines, between tributaries, and between
lines and tributaries.
Provides one STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical port. STM-1

optical ports support SFP electrical modules.
The STM-1/STM-4 optical port supports single-fiber

bidirectional optical modules.
Provides the clock unit with one synchronous timing source.
Processes section overheads and higher order path overheads.
Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and pass-through.
Provides transparent DCCs.
Sets and queries J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Processes AU pointers.
Supports maintenance features such as inloops and outloops

on VC-4 paths, setting of overhead bytes to be sent/received,
and pass-through tests and checks of K bytes.
The STM-16 optical port can be of the S-16.1, L-16.1, or

L-16.2 type.
The STM-4 optical port can be of the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2

type.
The STM-1 optical port can be of the S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2
Line functions
Optical module
specifications
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

49

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
Board
type.
An optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port or a

colored DWDM optical port. A colored CWDM optical port
supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km. A
colored DWDM optical port supports a transmission distance
of 120 km.
The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T

G.957.
Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used and the running

status can be monitored. This facilitates your maintenance.
Allows setting the on/off state of a laser and supports the

ALS function.
Optical module information can be detected and queried.
NOTE
Only an STM-16 optical port can be a colored DWDM optical port.
Clock functions
System control
functions
Supports the non-standard SSM protocol, standard SSM

protocol, and extended SSM protocol.
Provides synchronous clock signals for boards in the system.
Supports the following working modes: trace mode, holdover

mode, and free-run mode.
Controls clock source priorities.
Controls the clock source switching function.
Processes and sets the S1 byte.
Exchanges information with other boards, provides the data

configuration function, and collects performance data and
alarm data.
Provides a standard Ethernet NM port/RS-232 data terminal

equipment (DTE) port so that the NMS can manage the
equipment.
Alarms and
performance events
Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating

equipment management and maintenance.
Protection schemes
Supports the following equipment-level protection scheme:
Maintenance features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
1+1 backup
Supports the following network-level protection schemes:
Two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP
CXL4/CXL16: Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP
Linear MSP
SNCP
Inloops and outloops at optical ports
Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no

impact on services)
Board manufacturing information query

50

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
Board
In-service FPGA loading
Smooth upgrade of the board software
For the SDH line unit and the logical unit that consists of the system control and communication unit,
cross-connect unit, and clock unit on a CXL board, switching of services carried on either unit does not
cause switching of services carried on the other unit.

The CXL consists of a system control and communication unit, a cross-connect unit, a line
unit, a clock unit, and a power supply unit.
Figure 3-4 shows the functional block diagram of the CXL.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the CXL
Backplane
STM-1/4/16
Crossconnect unit
Line unit
TDM service
Service board
Control bus
System control and
communication unit of the
standby CXL board
Clock signal required
by other boards
Clock unit of the
standby CXL board
FE signal
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
System control and

communication unit
Clock
unit
Clock signal provided to the

other units on the board
units on the board
Power
supply
unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
System power supply

System power supply
+12 V power supplied to fans
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit.
The system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

51

Transmission System
The CPU unit performs the following control functions using the control bus:
Manages other boards and the other units on the CXL, and collects alarms and performance events.
Implements software loading by reading information from the CF card.
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and
enables FPGA loading.
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services
Exchanging orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
The system control and communication unit on a CXL board communicates with the
system control and communication unit on the standby CXL board by carrying FE
signals over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, the active and
standby CXL boards form a 1+1 hot backup relationship.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order
cross-connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the
functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-6 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
Higher
order crossconnect
module
HOXC
Sink TDM
service unit
Lower order
crossconnect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect
module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order
cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink
TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order
cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect
module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and
then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

52

Transmission System
cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM
service unit.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from service clock sources at service
ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked
loop, the clock unit provides the system clock to other units on the CXL and other
boards.
The clock units on the active and standby CXL boards transmit clock signals to each
other.
Line Unit
The line unit performs the following functions: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signal receiving,
serial/parallel conversion, clock signal extraction, data restoration, overhead processing, alarm
monitoring/reporting, signal inloops/outloops, MSP, and ALS functions.
Power Supply Unit

Combines and then converts -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs into the power supply
required by the chips of the other units on the local board.
Combines and then converts -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by other boards.
Combines and then converts -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
3.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-7 Front panel of the CXL
L
X
C
T G C V T S
A O N
T R Y R C O
S P S S A L
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
RST
TX/RX
NMS1/COM
EXT
Indicators
The front panel of the CXL has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, ACT,
and LOS. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

53

Transmission System
Management Ports
Table 3-30 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
NMS1/
COM
Ethernet NM
port/NM serial
port
RJ45
Pin 1: for the

network port to
transmit data
(+)
Pin 2: for the

network port to
transmit data
(-)
Pin 3: for the

network port to
receive data (+)
Pin 4: signal
ground
Pin 5: receive
end of the NM
serial port
Pin 6: for the

network port to
receive data (-)
Pin 7: not
defined
Pin 8: transmit
end of the NM
serial port
87654321
For status explanation

for the indicators of an
RJ45 port, see Table
3-31.
EXT
Reserved
Required
Cable
16.10
Network
Cable
When an NE is configured with two CXL boards, only port COM on the working CXL board is
available.

Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On

properly.
Off
On or blinking

data.
Off

transmitting data.
ACT (yellow)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

54

Transmission System
Service Ports
Table 3-32 Description of the service ports on the CXL
Por
t
Descriptio
n
Connector Type
Pin
Assignm
ent
TX/
RX
Transmits
and receives
STM-1/ST
M-4/STM-1
6
optical/elect
rical signals.
STM-1/4/16 optical port: LC SFP

optical module
TX
RX
STM-1 electrical port: SFP electrical

module
TX
RX
TX
repres
ents
the
transm
it port.
RX
repres
ents
the
receiv
e port.
Required
Cable
SFP optical
port: 16.1
Fiber
Jumper
SFP
electrical
port: 16.6
STM-1
Cable
Buttons
Table 3-33 Buttons
Button
Name
Description
RST
Warm reset button
After this button is pressed, a warm

reset is performed on the board.
3.2.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
CF Card
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. To synchronize the NE databases, system
parameters, and NE logs on the CXL board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the CXL board during package
diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize
software packages on the CXL board and the CF card.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

55

Transmission System
Positions of the DIP Switches and CF Card
3 2 1
2
DIP ON
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Meanings of DIP Switch Settings

Meaning
Indicates that the board works with the

watchdog enabled.
The value is reserved.
Indicates that a memory self-check is

running.
Indicates that the board is being

debugged.
Indicates that the board works with the

watchdog disabled and a full memory
check is running.
Indicates the BIOS holdover state.
Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.
The value is reserved. (By default, this

value indicates that the board works
with the watchdog enabled.)
Indicates that the equipment is being

tested and the NE software is started
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

56

Transmission System

4
Meaning
1
directly without a self-check.
Restores the data of the CF card.
Erases data in the system parameter

area.
Erases databases.
Erases NE software, including patches.
Erases databases and NE software

(including patches).
Erases all data in the file system.
Formats the flash file system, and

erases data in the system parameter
area and extended BIOS, with basic
BIOS reserved.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.2.6 Valid Slots

The CXL can be inserted in slot 7 (preferred) or slot 8 in the chassis.
3.2.7 Feature Code

indicates the type of optical port. CXL boards have feature codes.
Table 3-34 Feature code of the CXL
Feature Code
01
S-1.1
02
L-1.1
03
S-4.1
04
L-4.1
05
S-16.1
06
L-16.1
07
L-16.2
08
S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

57

Transmission System
Feature Code

wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.)
09

10
L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit

11
L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit

12

13


This section describes the board specifications, including the parameters specified for optical
ports, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 3-35 lists the technical specifications of the CXL.
Table 3-35 Technical specifications of the CXL
Item
Performance
Auxiliar
y and
manage
ment
ports
NMS1/
COM
Network management
system (NMS) port or
NMS serial port
Not involved
EXT
Reserved
Not involved
Service
ports
TX/RX
STM-1/4/16
optical/electrical ports
Table 3-37, Table 3-38, Table 3-39,

Table 3-40, Table 3-41, Table 3-36,
Table 3-42, Table 3-43
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
22.36 mm x 183.80 mm x 197.70 mm
Weight
0.50 kg
Power consumption
21 W

Item
Value
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Code pattern
CMI
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

58

Transmission System
Item
Value
Connector
SAA straight female
Permitted frequency deviation at

the input port
Allowed attenuation at the input
port
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
(km)
15
40
80
range (nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
-10

(dB)
8.2
10
10
NOTE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

59

Transmission System
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1
L-1.1
(km)
15
40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
10
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
15
40
80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
(dBm)
-28
-28
-28
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

60

Transmission System
Item
Value
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-8
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
NOTE
Paramete
r
Value
Nominal
bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Type of
optical
interface
S-4.1
L-4.1
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
15
40
Type of
fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490
1310
1490
1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310
1490
1310
1490
Launched
optical
power
range
-9 to -3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
-2 to 3

61

Transmission System
Paramete
r
Value
(dBm)
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5
-23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmission
distance (km)
15
40
80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-5 to 0
-2 to +3
-2 to +3
(dBm)
-18
-27
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-9
-9
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
NOTE
Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

62

Transmission System
Table 3-42 Parameters specified for colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
155,520 kbit/s (STM-1), 622,080 kbit/s (STM-4), 2,488,320 kbit/s

(STM-16)
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
40
80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5
0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)

20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
-28
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
Table 3-43 Parameters specified for colored STM-16 optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
2,488,320 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
(km)
120

range (dBm)
-1 to +3
Central frequency (THz)
192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10
(dBm)
-28
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

63

Transmission System
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-9

(dB)
8.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

64

Transmission System
4 Packet Processing Boards
Packet Processing Boards
About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 550 supports the following packet processing boards: EF8F, EG4C, EM6T,
EM6F, EX1, PEX1, PEG1, CQ1, and MD1.
PEX1 and PEG1 are integrated on the PCX board.
4.1
EF8F
The EF8F is an 8xFE processing board.

4.2
EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE processing board.

4.3
EG4C
The EG4C is a 4xGE processing board.

4.4
EX1
The EX1 is a 1x10GE Ethernet processing board.

4.5
MD1
The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board.

4.6
CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.
4.1 EF8F
The EF8F is an 8xFE processing board.

The functional version of the EF8F is TNM1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

65

Transmission System

The EF8F receives/transmits, processes, and converges 8xFE signals.
Table 4-1 lists the functions and features that the EF8F supports. The EF8F needs to work
with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to
implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 4-1 Functions and features that the EF8F supports
Board
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits fast Ethernet (FE) service signals and

works with the packet switching unit to process the
received FE service signals.
Backplane bus bandwidth
1.25 Gbit/s
Port specifications
FE optical port:
100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/100BASEVX/100BASE-ZX
FE electrical port: 100BASE-T
The following types of small form-factor pluggable

(SFP) modules are supported:
Port
attributes
Working mode
TAG attributes
Packet
services
FE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
FE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical

module
FE pluggable electrical module
FE optical ports support 100M full-duplex.
FE electrical ports support auto-negotiation.
The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or

hybrid.
Sets and queries the TAG attribute of a port.
Traffic control
at ports

Port type query
Supported
Query and
setting of
optical power
thresholds
Supported
Ethernet line
(E-Line)
services
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

transmission

(VLANs)


66

Transmission System
Board
services)
Ethernet local
area network
(E-LAN)
services
Protection
schemes
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by PWs

(virtual private LAN services [VPLSs])
Independent VLAN learning (IVL) and shared

VLAN learning (SVL) for native Ethernet services
Ethernet data
frame format
Jumbo frame
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600

bytes.
Maximum
transmission
unit (MTU)
Supports an MTU ranging from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes for

FE optical ports, with 1620 bytes being the default value.
Tunnel
automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
Pseudo wire
(PW) APS
MPLS-TP ring
protection
switching
(MRPS)
Multiple
Spanning Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)

Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP
provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP).
Ethernet ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
Link
aggregation
group (LAG)

aggregation
Link-state pass
Point-point and point-multipoint LPT
Supports an MTU ranging from 960 bytes to 9016 bytes for

FE electrical ports, with 1620 bytes being the default value.

67

Transmission System
Board
through (LPT)
DiffServ
information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities,
DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.

Supports complex traffic classification based on
C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values
carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress policies.
QoS policies

CAR
V-UNI ingresses.
Shaping

Maintenan
ce features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Multiprotocol
Label
Switching
(MPLS)/Multip
rotocol label
switching
transport
profile
(MPLS-TP)
operation,
administration
and
maintenance
(OAM)
MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification (CV),

fast failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication
(BDI), forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and
traceroute tests in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs),

remote defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal
(AIS) insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT)
tests, PW loss measurement (LM), locked signal
function (LCK), test (TST) (only packet loss test
supported), PW Client Signal Fail (CSF) indication, and
two-way delay measurement (DM) in compliance with
ITU-T G.8113.1.
Ethernet OAM
(ETH OAM)
Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion

in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.

68

Transmission System
Board

performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and
selfloop checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Inloops at the physical (PHY)/media access control (MAC) layer of Ethernet

ports
Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services)
SFP module information query
Ethernet performance monitoring (remote network monitoring [RMON])
Hot board swapping
Hot swapping for pluggable optical modules
Port mirroring
Synchroni
zation
Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and

NNI ports.
Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the

ingress direction of a UNI port.
Synchronous
Ethernet
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at eight FE

optical ports.
IEEE 1588v2
Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at eight FE

optical ports.
IEEE 1588
adaptive clock
recovery
(ACR)
Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at eight FE optical

ports.
Data communication
network (DCN)
Each FE port provides one inband DCN channel.
Internet Group Management

Protocol (IGMP) snooping
Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EF8F.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

69

Transmission System

Figure 4-2 EF8F board function block diagram
Backplane
FE signal
access unit
Control signal
Service
processing unit
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet
signal
Dual-fed and
selectivereceiving unit
Packet switching unit
FE signal
Control bus of the board
System control bus
Logic control
unit

to the board
Power
supply unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

Clock unit
System control and

communication unit
System power supply

System power supply
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 4-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EF8F
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
FE signal access
unit
Receives FE signals.
Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel

conversion for FE signals.
Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,

and CRC checks for frame signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Service processing
unit
Works with the system control, switching, and timing

board to provide the following functions:
Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
Processes labels in Multiprotocol Label Switching

(MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
(PWE3) packets.
Performs QoS processing such as traffic

classification and committed access rate (CAR)
restriction for Ethernet data frames.
Processes OAM packets and protocol packets.

70

Transmission System
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit
Transmits Ethernet data frames to the active and

standby packet switching units.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 4-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EF8F
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit
Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet

switching unit.
Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet

processing unit.
Service processing
unit

FE signal access unit
Processes labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets.
Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and

queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and

CRC code computing.
Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for

Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated
FE signals through Ethernet ports.
Control Signal Processing

The service processing unit controls the FE signal access unit using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the service processing unit and the dual-fed and
selective-receiving unit using the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the active and standby system control and
communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit
transmits the configuration data and query commands from the system control and
communication unit to various units of the board; it also transmits the command responses,
alarms, and performance events reported by units on the board to the system control and
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

71

Transmission System
Receives two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies from the backplane, converts the supplied
power into +3.3 V power by using the DC-DC unit, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the
other units on the board.
Clock Unit
The clock unit receives the system clock from the control bus on the backplane, and
supplies clock signals to other units on the EF8F.
FE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time
synchronization.
4.1.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-2 shows the front panel of the EF8F.
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the EF8F
F
8 T
F AV1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E T R /A /A A
/ /A /A A
/ /A /A
S S L L L L L L L L
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
OUT5
IN5
OUT6
IN6
OUT7
IN7
OUT8
IN8
Indicators
The front panel of the EF8F has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, L/A1, L/A2, L/A3,
L/A4, L/A5, L/A6, L/A7, and L/A8. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator
Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-4 Ports on an EF8F board
Port
Descripti
on
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
Required
Cable
IN1-IN
8
Input ports
for the first
to eighth
FE
optical/ele
ctrical
signals
LC SFP optical module:
LC SFP optical
module:
LC SFP
optical
module:
16.1 Fiber
Jumper
OUT1OUT8
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Output
ports for
the first to
OUT
IN
OUT
represents the
transmit port.
IN represents
the receive
port.
RJ-45 SFP electrical module:
87654321

RJ-45 SFP
electrical module:
RJ-45 SFP
electrical
module:
16.10
Network
Cable
72

Transmission System
Port
Descripti
on
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
eighth FE
optical/ele
ctrical
signals
Required
Cable
An FE electrical
port supports the
MDI, MDI-X, and
auto-MDI/MDI-X
modes. For pin
assignments for
the port, see Table
4-5 and Table 4-6.
Table 4-5 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI mode

Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A

(+)
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-

(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B

(+)
Reserved
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
Table 4-6 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI-X mode

Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

73

Transmission System
Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
4.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers

None.
4.1.6 Valid Slots

The EF8F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 3 and 5 >
slots 1 and 2 > slots 4 and 6. The logical slots of the EF8F on the NMS are the same as its
physical slots.
4.1.7 Feature Code

None.

Table 4-7 lists the technical specifications of the EF8F.
Table 4-7 Technical Specifications of the EF8F
Item
Performance
Service ports
For the specifications of the FE optical port, see Table 4-10, Table
4-11, and Table 4-12.
For the specifications of the FE electrical port, see Table 4-8 and
Table 4-9.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

74

Transmission System
Item
Performance
Weight
0.55 kg
Power consumption
23 W
Table 4-8 Specifications of the EF8F Ethernet electrical ports

Service Port
Port Rate
Code Pattern
Port Type
FE electrical
port
100BASE-T
MLT-3 coding
signals
RJ45
Table 4-9 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE electrical ports
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
148810.00
12.80
0.00
744050.00
128.00
84459.00
17.90
0.00
422295.00
256.00
45290.00
28.00
0.00
226450.00
512.00
23496.00
48.40
0.00
117480.00
1024.00
11973.00
89.40
0.00
59865.00
1280.00
9615.00
109.80
0.00
48075.00
1518.00
8126.00
129.00
0.00
40635.00
2000.00
6188.00
167.50
0.00
30940.00
9600.00
1299.00
773.10
0.00
6459.00
Table 4-10 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports

Item
Value
Optical port
type
100BASE-FX
100BASE-LX
100BASE-VX
100BASE-ZX
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
15
40
80
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

75

Transmission System
Item
Value
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean
launched
power
(dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-14
-8
-10
-10
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10
8.2
10
10
Table 4-11 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
100Base-BX
(km)
15
40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

76

Transmission System
Table 4-12 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
148810.00
44.90
0.00
744050.00
128.00
84459.00
65.90
0.00
422295.00
256.00
45290.00
106.50
0.00
226450.00
512.00
23496.00
182.20
0.00
117480.00
1024.00
11973.00
241.10
0.00
59865.00
1280.00
9615.00
269.20
0.00
48075.00
1518.00
8126.00
292.20
0.00
40635.00
2000.00
6188.00
341.90
0.00
30940.00
9600.00
1299.00
1133.30
0.00
6459.00
4.2 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE processing board.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is TNM1.

The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits and processes four FE signals and two GE signals.
Table 4-13 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports. The EM6T/EM6F
needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing
board to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 4-13 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works with the

packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service
signals.
Backplane bus
bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
EM6T
EM6F

77

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
Board
Port
specifica
tions
FE
electrical
port
Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
FE optical
port
GE port
EM6T
Provides two fixed

ports:
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
EM6F
GE ports can function as FE

optical ports if pluggable FE
optical modules are used. The
following types of FE optical ports
are supported:
100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100B
ASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100BASE
-ZX
The following types of small

form-factor pluggable (SFP)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Working
mode
FE two-fiber bidirectional
FE single-fiber bidirectional
Provides two GE ports by using

SFP modules of any of the
following types:
1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/10
00BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/1000
Base-T
The following types of SFP

Port
attributes
GE two-fiber bidirectional
GE single-fiber bidirectional
GE pluggable electrical module
A GE optical port can be a colored

CWDM optical port. A colored
CWDM optical port supports a
transmission distance of 40 km or
80 km.
The FE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M

half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
The FE optical port supports 100M full-duplex.
The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M

half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M
full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and

auto-negotiation.

78

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
Packet
services
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Board
EM6T
EM6F
TAG
attributes
Traffic
control at
ports
Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies

with IEEE 802.3x.
Port type
query
Supported
Query and
setting of
optical
power
thresholds
Not supported
E-Line
services
E-LAN
services
Protectio
n
The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.
Supported

transmission

(VLANs)
ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services:

E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS services)
ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by PWs (virtual

private LAN services [VPLSs])
Independent VLAN learning (IVL) and shared VLAN

learning (SVL) for native Ethernet services
Ethernet
data frame
format
Jumbo
frame
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Maximum
transmissio
n unit
(MTU)
Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes being the
default value.
Tunnel
automatic

79

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
schemes
Board
EM6T
EM6F
protection
switching
(APS)
Pseudo
wire (PW)
APS
MPLS-TP
ring
protection
switching
(MRPS)
Multiple
Spanning
Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)
Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal Spanning

Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same
functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Ethernet
ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
Link
aggregatio
n group
(LAG)
Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static aggregation
Link-state
pass
through
(LPT)
Quality of service
(QoS)
DiffServ
information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP
values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.

Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN
IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities,
C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN
priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI
ingress policies.
QoS policies

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

80

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
Board
EM6T
EM6F
CAR
V-UNI ingresses.
Shaping

Mainten
ance
features
Multiproto
col Label
Switching
(MPLS)/M
ultiprotoco
l label
switching
transport
profile
(MPLS-TP
) operation,
administrat
ion and
maintenanc
e (OAM)
MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification (CV), fast

failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication (BDI),
forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests in
compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs), remote

defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal (AIS)
insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss
measurement (LM), locked signal function (LCK), test (TST)
(only packet loss test supported), PW Client Signal Fail (CSF)
indication, and two-way delay measurement (DM) in
compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Ethernet
OAM
(ETH
OAM)
Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion in

compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.


performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and selfloop
checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Inloops at the physical PHY/MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

81

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
Board
EM6T
EM6F
Hot board swapping

Port
mirroring
Synchro
nization
Synchrono
us Ethernet
Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI

ports.
Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress

direction of a UNI port.
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at six ports.

NOTE
SFP electrical modules do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks.
Data communication
network (DCN)
Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
(IGMP) snooping
Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

82

Transmission System

Figure 4-4 EM6T/EM6F board function block diagram
Backplane
GE signal
GE signal
access unit
Control signal
Service
processing unit
FE signal
access unit
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet
signal
Dual-fed and
Control signal
FE signal
System control bus
Logic control
unit

to the board
Power
supply unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

Clock unit
System control and

communication unit
System power supply

System power supply
System clock signal

Table 4-14 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EM6T/EM6F
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
GE signal access
unit/FE signal
access unit
Receives GE/FE signals.

conversion for GE/FE signals.

and cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) for frame
signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Service processing
unit


(PWE3) packets.


83

Transmission System
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit


Table 4-15 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EM6T/EM6F
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit

switching unit.

processing unit.
Service processing
unit

GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit


CRC code computing.

GE/FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The service processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit using management control
signals.
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

84

Transmission System
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
4.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-5 Front panel of the EM6T
T
6
M
E
T
A
T
S
GV
OR
R S
P
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
T
6
M
E
Figure 4-6 Front panel of the EM6F

F
6
M
E
T
A
T
S
2
G V 1
K
O R K
N
I
R S IN
L L
P
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
F
6
M
E
Indicators
The front panel of the EM6T has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, and PROG. The front
panel of the EM6F has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, PROG, LINK1, and LINK2. For
status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-16 Ports on an EM6T/EM6F board
Port
Bo
ard
Descri
ption
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
FE1,
FE2,
FE3,
FE4
EM
6T/
EM
6F
FE
service
port
RJ45
GE1
/GE
2
EM
6T
GE
service
port
(fixed
RJ45
The FE ports and

GE electrical ports
support the MDI,
MDI-X, and
auto-MDI/MDI-X
modes. Table 4-18
and Table 4-19
provide the pin
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
87654321
For status
explanation
for the
indicators of

Required
Cable
16.10
Network
Cable
85

Transmission System
Port
Bo
ard
Descri
ption
Connector Type
electric
al port)
EM
6F
FE/GE
service
port
(using
SFP
module
s)
GE
electrical
port: SFP
electrical
module
an RJ45 port,
see Table
4-17.
FE/GE optical port: LC

SFP optical module
TX
RX
Pin Assignment
Required
Cable
assignments for an
RJ45 port in
different modes.
TX represents
the transmit port.
RX represents
the receive port.
16.1 Fiber
Jumper

Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On

properly.
Off
On or blinking

data.
Off

transmitting data.
ACT (yellow)

Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

86

Transmission System
Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)

Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.

None.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

87

Transmission System
4.2.6 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4
and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS are
the same as its physical slots.
4.2.7 Feature Code

None.

Table 4-20 lists the technical specifications of the EM6T/EM6F.
Table 4-20 Technical specifications of the EM6T/EM6F
Item
Service
ports
Performance
FE1,
FE2,
FE3,
FE4
FE electrical port
See Table 4-21 and Table 4-22.
GE1,
GE2
FE optical port
See Table 4-23, Table 4-24, and Table 4-25.
GE electrical port
GE optical port
By using different SFP modules, the

equipment provides GE optical ports with
different application codes and transmission
distances.
For port specifications, see Table 4-27, Table
4-28, Table 4-30, and Table 4-29.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
EM6T: 0.37 kg
EM6F: 0.40 kg
EM6T: 10.4 W
EM6F: 11.3 W
Power consumption
Table 4-21 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports
Service Port
Port Rate
Code Pattern
Port Type
GE/FE
electrical port
10BASE-T
Manchester coding
signals
RJ45
GE/FE
100BASE-T(X)
MLT-3 coding
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

88

Transmission System
Service Port
Port Rate
electrical port
Code Pattern
Port Type
signals
GE electrical
port
1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5 coding
signals
Table 4-22 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE electrical ports
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
148810.00
12.80
0.00
744050.00
128.00
84459.00
17.90
0.00
422295.00
256.00
45290.00
28.00
0.00
226450.00
512.00
23496.00
48.40
0.00
117480.00
1024.00
11973.00
89.40
0.00
59865.00
1280.00
9615.00
109.80
0.00
48075.00
1518.00
8126.00
129.00
0.00
40635.00
2000.00
6188.00
167.50
0.00
30940.00
9600.00
1299.00
773.10
0.00
6459.00

Item
Value
Optical port
type
100BASE-FX
100BASE-LX
100BASE-VX
100BASE-ZX
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
15
40
80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean
launched
power
(dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

89

Transmission System
Item
Value
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-14
-8
-10
-10
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10
8.2
10
10
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
100Base-BX
(km)
15
40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
10
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
148810.00
44.90
0.00
744050.00
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

90

Transmission System
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
128.00
84459.00
65.90
0.00
422295.00
256.00
45290.00
106.50
0.00
226450.00
512.00
23496.00
182.20
0.00
117480.00
1024.00
11973.00
241.10
0.00
59865.00
1280.00
9615.00
269.20
0.00
48075.00
1518.00
8126.00
292.20
0.00
40635.00
2000.00
6188.00
341.90
0.00
30940.00
9600.00
1299.00
1133.30
0.00
6459.00
Table 4-26 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE electrical ports
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
1488095.00
7.00
0.00
7440475.00
128.00
844595.00
7.40
0.00
4222975.00
256.00
452899.00
8.40
0.00
2264495.00
512.00
234962.00
10.60
0.00
1174810.00
1024.00
119732.00
14.70
0.00
598660.00
1280.00
96154.00
17.00
0.00
480770.00
1518.00
81274.00
18.90
0.00
406370.00
2000.00
61881.00
22.60
0.00
309405.00
9600.00
12994.00
83.40
0.00
64970.00

Item
Value
Optical port
type
1000BASE-SX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX

1000BASE-ZX
91

Transmission System
Item
Value
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5
10
40
80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17
-20
-23
-23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
Paramete
r
Value
Type of
optical
interface
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
10
40
Type of
fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490
1310
1490
1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310
1490
1310
1490
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

92

Transmission System
Paramete
r
Value
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5
-23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
1488095.00
9.00
0.00
7440475.00
128.00
844595.00
11.80
0.00
4222975.00
256.00
452899.00
17.30
0.00
2264495.00
512.00
234962.00
25.00
0.00
1174810.00
1024.00
119732.00
29.20
0.00
598660.00
1280.00
96154.00
31.30
0.00
480770.00
1518.00
81274.00
33.40
0.00
406370.00
2000.00
61881.00
37.40
0.00
309405.00
9600.00
12994.00
98.00
0.00
64970.00

Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
1,250,000 kbit/s

93

Transmission System
Parameter
Value
CWDM
rate
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
40
80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5
0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)

20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
-28
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-9
8.2
8.2
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
4.3 EG4C
The EG4C is a 4xGE processing board.

The functional version of the EG4C is TNM1.

The EG4C receives/transmits and processes 4xFE/GE signals.
Table 4-31 lists the functions and features that the EG4C supports. The EG4C needs to work
with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to
implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 4-31 Functions and features that the EG4C supports
Board
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals, and

process these signals by working with the packet
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

94

Transmission System
Board
switching unit.
5 Gbit/s
Port specifications
Provides optical/electrical ports for 4xFE/GE signals.

On the front panel of an EG4C board, the first four
ports are optical ports using small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) optical modules, and the last four
ports are fixed electrical ports. The ports with the
same ID cannot be used simultaneously.
Port attributes
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The following types of fixed GE electrical ports

are supported: 1000BASE-T
The following types of FE SFP optical modules

are supported:
100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/100B
ASE-VX/100BASE-ZX
The following types of GE SFP optical modules

are supported:
1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/1
000BASE-ZX
The following types of SFP modules are

supported:
FE/GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable

optical module
FE/GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable

optical module
A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM

optical port. A colored CWDM optical port
supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80
km.
The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex,

100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex

and auto-negotiation.
The FE optical port supports 100M full-duplex.
TAG attributes
The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,

or hybrid.
Traffic control
function

Port type query
Supported
Query and
setting of
optical power
thresholds
Supported
Ethernet line
Working mode
Packet services

95

Transmission System
Board
(E-Line)
services
Ethernet local
area network
(E-LAN)
services
Protection
schemes
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
E-Line services based on point-to-point

transparent transmission
E-Line services based on virtual local area

networks (VLANs)
E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q

(QinQ)

services)
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad

bridges
ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by

PWs (virtual private LAN services [VPLSs])

VLAN learning (SVL) for native Ethernet
services
Ethernet data
frame format
Jumbo frame
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of

9600 bytes.
Maximum
transmission
unit (MTU)
Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620

bytes being the default value.
Tunnel
automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
Pseudo wire
(PW) APS
MPLS-TP ring
protection
switching
(MRPS)
Multiple
Spanning Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)

provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol (RSTP).

96

Transmission System
Board
Ethernet ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T

G.8032/Y.1344.
Link
aggregation
group (LAG)

aggregation
Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load

sharing
Link-state pass
through (LPT)
DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by
specifying PHB service classes for service flows
based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or
MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.

S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI
ingress policies.
QoS policies

Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches
rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress
policy.
CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at
ports and V-UNI ingresses.
Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW
ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.

Maintenance
features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Multiprotocol
Label
Switching
(MPLS)/Multip
rotocol label
switching
MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification

(CV), fast failure detection (FFD), backward
defect indication (BDI), forward defect indication
(FDI), ping, and traceroute tests in compliance

97

Transmission System

transport profile
(MPLS-TP)
operation,
administration
and
maintenance
(OAM)
Ethernet OAM
(ETH OAM)
Board
with ITU-T Y.1711.
MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks

(CCs), remote defect indication (RDI), alarm
indication signal (AIS) insertion, loopback (LB)
tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss measurement
(LM), locked signal function (LCK), test (TST)
(only packet loss test supported), PW Client
measurement (DM) in compliance with ITU-T
G.8113.1.
Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS

insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM

with reference to ITU-T Y.7131.
Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM

auto-discovery, link performance monitoring,
remote loopbacks, and selfloop checks in
compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Inloops at the physical (PHY)/media access control (MAC) layer of

Ethernet ports
Warm resets (having no impact on services) and cold resets
Hot-swappable board
Port mirroring
Synchronizatio
n
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a

UNI port.
Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI

and NNI ports.
Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in

the ingress direction of a UNI port.
Synchronous
Ethernet
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at four

ports.
IEEE 1588v2
Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at

four ports.

98

Transmission System
Board
IEEE 1588
adaptive clock
recovery (ACR)
Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at four ports.
Data communication network

(DCN)
Provides one inband DCN channel at each GE port.

Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EG4C.

Figure 4-7 EG4C board function block diagram
Backplane
FE/GE signal
access unit
Control signal
Service
processing unit
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet
signal
Dual-fed and
FE/GE signal
Logic control
unit

to the board
System control bus
Power
supply unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Clock unit

System control and

communication unit
System power supply

System power supply
System clock signal
99

Transmission System

Table 4-32 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EG4C
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
FE/GE signal access

unit
Receives FE/GE signals.

conversion for FE/GE signals.

signals.
Service processing
unit
Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit


(PWE3) packets.



Table 4-33 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EG4C
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit

switching unit.

processing unit.
Service processing
unit

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
FE/GE signal access

unit


CRC code computing.

100

Transmission System
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
FE/GE signals through Ethernet ports.

The service processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit using management control
signals.
communication unit to other units on the EG4C; it also transmits the response messages,
alarms, and performance events from other units on the EG4C to the system control and
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
supplies clock signals to other units on the EG4C.
FE/GE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time
synchronization.
4.3.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-8 Front panel of the EG4C
C
4
G
E
OUT 1/IN 1
OUT 2/IN 2
OUT 3/IN 3
OUT 4/IN 4
T V 1 2 3 4
A
T R A
/ /A A
/ /A
S S L L L L
1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

101

Transmission System
Indicators
The front panel of the EG4C has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, L/A1, L/A2, L/A3, and
L/A4. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-34 Ports on an EG4C board
Port
Descrip
tion
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
Required
Cable
GE1GE4
GE
service
port
(fixed
electrica
l port)
RJ45
The GE electrical
ports support the
medium dependent
interface (MDI),
medium dependent
interface crossover
(MDI-X), and
auto-MDI/MDI-X
modes. Table 4-36
and Table 4-37
provide the pin
assignments for an
RJ45 port in different
modes.
16.10
Network
Cable
FE/GE
service
port
(using
SFP
modules
)
LC SFP optical module
87654321
For status
explanation for
the indicators
of an RJ45
port, see Table
4-35.
OUT
OUT represents
the transmit port.
IN represents the
receive port.
IN
16.1 Fiber
Jumper

Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On

properly.
Off
On or blinking

data.
Off

transmitting data.
ACT (yellow)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

102

Transmission System

Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)

Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

103

Transmission System
Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Signal
Function
Function
(-)
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EG4C.

None.
4.3.6 Valid Slots

The EG4C can be inserted in slots 3-6, and slots 4 and 6 are preferred. The logical slots of the
EG4C on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
4.3.7 Feature Code

None.

Table 4-38 lists the technical specifications of the EG4C.
Table 4-38 Technical Specifications of the EG4C
Item
Service
ports
Performance
GE1-GE
4
GE electrical
port
FE/GE optical
port
By using various SFP modules, the equipment

provides FE/GE optical ports with various
application codes and transmission distances.
For FE optical port specifications, see Table
4-41, Table 4-42, and Table 4-43.
For GE optical port specifications, see Table
4-44, Table 4-45, Table 4-47, and Table 4-46.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.45 kg
Power consumption
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
4xGE optical ports: 12.5 W

104

Transmission System
Item
Performance
4xGE electrical ports: 11.0 W
Table 4-39 Specifications of the EG4C Ethernet electrical ports

Service Port
Port Rate
Code Pattern
Port Type
GE electrical
port
1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5 coding
signals
RJ45
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
1488095.00
7.00
0.00
7440475.00
128.00
844595.00
7.40
0.00
4222975.00
256.00
452899.00
8.40
0.00
2264495.00
512.00
234962.00
10.60
0.00
1174810.00
1024.00
119732.00
14.70
0.00
598660.00
1280.00
96154.00
17.00
0.00
480770.00
1518.00
81274.00
18.90
0.00
406370.00
2000.00
61881.00
22.60
0.00
309405.00
9600.00
12994.00
83.40
0.00
64970.00

Item
Value
Optical port
type
100BASE-FX
100BASE-LX
100BASE-VX
100BASE-ZX
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
15
40
80
Operating
wavelength
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

105

Transmission System
Item
Value
(nm)
Mean
launched
power
(dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-14
-8
-10
-10
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10
8.2
10
10
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
100Base-BX
(km)
15
40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

106

Transmission System
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
148810.00
44.90
0.00
744050.00
128.00
84459.00
65.90
0.00
422295.00
256.00
45290.00
106.50
0.00
226450.00
512.00
23496.00
182.20
0.00
117480.00
1024.00
11973.00
241.10
0.00
59865.00
1280.00
9615.00
269.20
0.00
48075.00
1518.00
8126.00
292.20
0.00
40635.00
2000.00
6188.00
341.90
0.00
30940.00
9600.00
1299.00
1133.30
0.00
6459.00

Item
Value
Optical port
type
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
1000BASE-ZX
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5
10
40
80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17
-20
-23
-23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

107

Transmission System
Item
Value
ratio (dB)
Paramete
r
Value
Type of
optical
interface
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
10
40
Type of
fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490
1310
1490
1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310
1490
1310
1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5
-23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

108

Transmission System
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
1488095.00
9.00
0.00
7440475.00
128.00
844595.00
11.80
0.00
4222975.00
256.00
452899.00
17.30
0.00
2264495.00
512.00
234962.00
25.00
0.00
1174810.00
1024.00
119732.00
29.20
0.00
598660.00
1280.00
96154.00
31.30
0.00
480770.00
1518.00
81274.00
33.40
0.00
406370.00
2000.00
61881.00
37.40
0.00
309405.00
9600.00
12994.00
98.00
0.00
64970.00

Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
1,250,000 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
40
80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5
0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)

20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
-28
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-9
8.2
8.2
Minimum
extinction ratio
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

109

Transmission System
Parameter
Value
CWDM
(dB)
4.4 EX1
The EX1 is a 1x10GE Ethernet processing board.

The functional version of the EX1 is TNM1.

The EX1 receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals.
Table 4-48 lists the functions and features that the EX1 supports. The EX1 needs to work with
the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement
Ethernet service functions.
Table 4-48 Functions and features that the EX1 supports
Board
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits 10GE service signals, and

process these signals by working with the packet
switching unit.
10 Gbit/s
Port specifications
One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR

(LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR
(LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER
(LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR
(LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
A 10GE optical port can be a colored CWDM

optical port or a colored DWDM optical port. A
colored CWDM optical port supports a
transmission distance of 70 km. A colored
DWDM optical port supports a transmission
Port attributes
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Working mode
Supports 10G full-duplex and supports the setting of

the LAN mode or WAN mode.
TAG attributes
Traffic control
at ports

The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,

or hybrid.

110

Transmission System
Packet services
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Board
Port type query
Supported
Query and
setting of
optical power
thresholds
Supported
E-Line services
E-LAN services
Protection
schemes
E-Line services based on point-to-point

transparent transmission
E-Line services based on virtual local area

networks (VLANs)
E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q

(QinQ)

services)
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad

bridges
ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by

PWs (virtual private LAN services [VPLSs])

VLAN learning (SVL) for native Ethernet
services
Ethernet data
frame format
Jumbo frame
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of

9600 bytes.
Maximum
transmission
unit (MTU)
Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620

bytes being the default value.
Tunnel
automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
Pseudo wire
(PW) APS
MPLS-TP ring
protection

111

Transmission System
Board
switching
(MRPS)
Multiple
Spanning Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)

provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Ethernet ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T

G.8032/Y.1344.
Link
aggregation
group (LAG)

aggregation
Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load

sharing
Link-state pass
through (LPT)
DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by
specifying PHB service classes for service flows
based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or
MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.

S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI
ingress policies.
QoS policies

Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches
rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress
policy.
CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at
ports and V-UNI ingresses.
Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW
ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

112

Transmission System
Board
Maintenance
features
Multiprotocol
Label
Switching
(MPLS)/Multip
rotocol label
switching
transport profile
(MPLS-TP)
operation,
administration
and
maintenance
(OAM)
MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification

(CV), fast failure detection (FFD), backward
defect indication (BDI), forward defect indication
(FDI), ping, and traceroute tests in compliance
with ITU-T Y.1711.
MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks

(CCs), remote defect indication (RDI), alarm
indication signal (AIS) insertion, loopback (LB)
tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss measurement
(LM), locked signal function (LCK), test (TST)
(only packet loss test supported), PW Client
measurement (DM) in compliance with ITU-T
G.8113.1.
ETH OAM
Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS

insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM

with reference to ITU-T Y.7131.
Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM

auto-discovery, link performance monitoring,
remote loopbacks, and selfloop checks in
compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Inloops at the physical PHY/MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Warm resets (having no impact on services) and cold resets
XFP module information query
Hot-swappable board
Port mirroring
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a

UNI port.
Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI

and NNI ports.
Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in

the ingress direction of a UNI port.

113

Transmission System
Board
Synchronizatio
n
Synchronous
Ethernet
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at one

port.
IEEE 1588v2
Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at one

port.
IEEE 1588
adaptive clock
recovery (ACR)
Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at one port.

NOTE
Ports working in 10GE WAN mode do not support IEEE
1588v2 or IEEE 1588 ACR.
Data communication network

(DCN)
Provides one inband DCN channel.

Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EX1.

Figure 4-9 EX1 board function block diagram
Backplane
Ethernet
signal
10GE signal
access unit
Control signal
Service
processing unit
Ethernet
signal
Dual-fed and
10GE signal
Ethernet
signal

(active)

(backup)
Logic control
unit

to the board
System control bus
Power
supply unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Clock unit

System control and

communication unit
System power supply

System power supply
System clock signal
114

Transmission System

Table 4-49 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EX1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
10GE signal access

unit
Receives 10GE signals.

conversion for 10GE signals.

signals.
Service processing
unit
Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit


(PWE3) packets.



Table 4-50 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EX1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit

switching unit.

processing unit.
Service processing
unit

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
10GE signal access

unit


CRC code computing.

115

Transmission System
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
10GE signals through Ethernet ports.

communication unit to other units on the EX1; it also transmits the response messages, alarms,
and performance events from other units on the EX1 to the system control and
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
supplies clock signals to other units on the EX1.
The clock unit processes IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR protocol packets.
4.4.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-10 Front panel of the EX1
1
X
E
OUT
IN
T
A V
T R A
/
S S L
Indicators
The front panel of the EX1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, and L/A. For status
explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

116

Transmission System
Ports
Table 4-51 Ports on an EX1 board
Port
Descripti
on
Connector Type
Pin
Assignment
IN
Receives
10GE
signals.
XFP optical module
OUT
represents the
transmit port.
IN represents
the receive
port.
OUT
OUT
IN
Transmits
10GE
signals.
Required
Cable
16.1 Fiber
Jumper
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EX1.

None.
4.4.6 Valid Slots

The EX1 can be inserted in slot 1 (preferred) or slot 2. Its logical slot on the network
management system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.
The backplane bus bandwidth of the EX1 board is 10 Gbit/s so the EX1 board cannot work with the
PCXGA board. That is, when the system control board is the PCXGA board, slots 1 and 2 cannot house
EX1 boards.
4.4.7 Feature Code

None.

Table 4-52 lists the technical specifications of the EX1.
Table 4-52 Technical specifications of the EX1
Item
Performance
Service ports
For 10GE optical port specifications, see Table 4-53, Table 4-54,
and Table 4-55.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

117

Transmission System
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x
D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.48 kg
Power consumption
11 W
Table 4-53 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's 10GE optical ports
Item
Value
Optical port
type
10GBASE-SR
(LAN)/10GBAS
E-SW (WAN)
10GBASE-LR
(LAN)/10GBAS
E-LW (WAN)
10GBASE-ER
(LAN)/10GBAS
E-EW (WAN)
10GBASE-ZR
(LAN)/10GBAS
E-ZW (WAN)
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
0.3
10
40
80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
840 to 860
1260 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-1.3 to -7.3
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to 4
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-7.5
-11
-15
-24
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1
0.5
-1
-7
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
Table 4-54 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

118

Transmission System
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
70

range (dBm)
0 to 4
range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23
1571 nm: -22
1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21
Minimum overload (dBm)
-9

(dB)
8.2
Table 4-55 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
40
80
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-1 to +2
-1 to +3
Central frequency
(THz)
192.1 to 196.0
192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10
10
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-24
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1
-9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
9.5
8.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

119

Transmission System
4.5 MD1
The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board.

The functional version of the MD1 is TNM1.

The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 4-56 lists the functions and features that the MD1 supports.
Table 4-56 Functions and features that the MD1 supports
Description
Basic functions
Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports flexible

configuration of E1 service categories.
E1 service categories
Supports the following E1 service categories:
CES E1
ATM/IMA E1
Port specifications
Provides thirty-two 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 ports.
ATM/IMA
Maximum
number of
ATM
services
Local: 32
Remote: 64
Maximum
number of
ATM
connections
Local: 128
Remote: 256
ATM
traffic
managemen
t
Supported
ATM
encapsulati
on mode
Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:
Maximum
number of
concatenate
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
N-to-one VPC
N-to-one VCC
One-to-one VPC
One-to-one VCC
31

120

Transmission System
Description
d ATM
cells
ATM OAM
CES
Synchroni
zation
Maintenan
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level),

including the following functions:
Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect indication

(RDI)
Continuity check test
Loopback test
Maximum
number of
IMA
groups
32
Maximum
number of
members in
an IMA
group
16
Maximum
number of
services
32
Encapsulati
on mode
Supports the following encapsulation modes:
CESoPSN
SAToP
Service
category
Point-to-point services
Compressio
n of vacant
slots
Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)
Jitter
buffering
time (us)
375-16000
Packet
loading
time (us)
125-5000
CES ACR
Supported
NOTE
Supports CES ACR for a maximum of four channels. The clock
information that is recovered from the services transported at ports
116 can be sent out only from ports 116; the clock information that
is recovered from the services transported at ports 1732 can be sent
out only from ports 1732.
Retiming
Supports tributary retiming and system retiming.
Loopback
Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

121

Transmission System
Description
ce features
Cold reset
and warm
reset
Supported (with warm resets having no impact on services)
PRBS tests
at E1 ports
Supported
Board
manufacturi
ng
information
query
Supported
Board
power
consumptio
n
information
query
Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the MD1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

122

Transmission System
Functional Block Diagram

Figure 4-11 Functional block diagram of the MD1
Backplane
E1
E1
in
te
rf
a
c
e
u
n
it
S
ig
n
a
l
p
ro
c
e
s
s
in
g
u
n
it
S
e
rv
ic
e
Service
bus
p
ro
c
e
s
s
in
g
u
n
it
L
o
g
ic
GE bus
Control bus
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit

to the board
Power
supply unit
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
Clock signal provided to the other units of the board
Clock
unit
System power supply

System power supply
System clock signal

Table 4-57 Signal processing in the receive direction of the MD1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Signal interface unit
Receives external E1 signals.
Matches the resistance.
Equalizes signals.
Converts the level.
Restores clock signals.
Buffers the received data.
Performs HDB3 decoding.
Frames E1 signals.
Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA

services.
Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3

services into Ethernet services.
Shifts transmission of service signals from the

internal service bus to the GE bus in the backplane.
Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Service processing
unit
Logic processing
unit

123

Transmission System

Table 4-58 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the MD1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit.
Shifts transmission of service signals from the GE

bus in the backplane to the internal service bus.
Decapsulates service signals.
Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA

services.
Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1

signals to the signal interface unit.
Performs HDB3 coding.
Performs clock re-timing.
Shapes pulses.
Drives the line.
Sends E1 signals to a port.
Service processing
unit

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication
unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board
over the control bus.
These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU
unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

124

Transmission System
4.5.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-12 Front panel of the MD1
1
D
M
16
T
A V
T R
S S
32
17
Indicators
The front panel of the MD1 has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status
Ports
Table 4-59 Ports on an MD1 board
Port
Descript
ion
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
Required Cable
1 to
16
The first
to
sixteenth
E1 ports
Anea 96
See Table 4-60.
16.7 16xE1/T1
Cable
17 to
32
The
seventeen
th to
thirty-sec
ond E1
ports
POS.1
POS.96
Table 4-60 Pin assignments for an Anea 96 port

Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
The first received E1

differential signal (+)
25
The first transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

differential signal (-)
26

signal (-)
The second received E1

27
The second transmitted E1

28
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

125

Transmission System
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
The third received E1

29
The third transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

30

signal (-)
The fourth received E1

31
The fourth transmitted E1


32

The fifth received E1

33
The fifth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
10

34

signal (-)
11
The sixth received E1

35
The sixth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
12

36

signal (-)
13
The seventh received E1

37
The seventh transmitted E1

14

38

15
The eighth received E1

39
The eighth transmitted E1

16

40

17
The ninth received E1

41
The ninth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
18

42

signal (-)
19
The tenth received E1

43
The tenth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
20

44

signal (-)
21
The eleventh received E1

45
The eleventh transmitted E1

22

46

23
The twelfth received E1

47
The twelfth transmitted E1

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

126

Transmission System
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
24

48

49
The thirteenth received E1

73
The thirteenth transmitted E1

50

74

51
The fourteenth received E1

75
The fourteenth transmitted E1

52

76

53
The fifteenth received E1

77
The fifteenth transmitted E1

54

78

55
The sixteenth received E1

79
The sixteenth transmitted E1

56

80


None.
4.5.6 Valid Slots

The MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4 and 6 >
slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the MD1 on the NMS are the same as its
physical slots.
4.5.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the MD1 indicates the E1 port impedance.
Table 4-61 Feature codes of the MD1
Feature Code
Port Impedance (Ohm)
75
120
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

127

Transmission System

Table 4-62 lists the technical specifications of the MD1.
Table 4-62 Technical specifications of the MD1
Item
Performance
E1 ports (1-16
and 17-32)
See Table 4-63.
Dimensions (H
x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.50 kg
Power
consumption
12.2 W
Table 4-63 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports
Item
Value
Standard compliance
ITU-T G.703/G.823
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Pair in each direction
One coaxial pair
One symmetrical pair
Port type
Anea 96
4.6 CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.

The functional version of CQ1 boards is TNM1.

CQ1 boards receive and transmit four channels of channelized STM-1 optical/electrical
signals.
Table 4-64 lists the functions and features supported by CQ1 boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

128

Transmission System
Table 4-64 Functions and features that CQ1 boards support

Description
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits four channels of channelized STM-1

optical/electrical signals.
Supported packet service

types
Circuit emulation service (CES) E1
ML-PPP E1
Port
specificati
ons
Provides four STM-1 SFP optical ports, which can be

S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical ports.
Supports single-fiber bidirectional optical modules.
Electrical
ports
Use SFP electrical modules.
Comply with ITU-T G.703.
Maximum
number of
services
252
Encapsulation
mode
CESoPSN (CESoPSN stands for circuit emulation

services over packet switch networks)
SAToP (SAToP stands for Structure-Agnostic Time

Division Multiplexing over Packet)
CES
ML-PPP
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Optical ports
Idle timeslot
compression
Supported only in CESoPSN mode
Jitter
buffering time
(us)
375 to 16,000
Packet
loading time
(us)
125 to 5,000
CES
ACR(ACR
stands for
adaptive
clock
recovery)
Supported, but the NE can only function as a master node
Transparent
transmission
of SDH
overheads in
packet
networks
D1 to D12, E1, and E2 bytes
Type of links
carrying
ML-PPP links
VC-12s in channelized STM-1s (service type: PWE3 over

tunnel)
Maximum
number of
supported
252

129

Transmission System
Description
PPP links
Maximum
number of
supported
ML-PPP
groups
32
Maximum
number of
links in one
ML-PPP
group
16
Linear multiplex section

protection (LMSP) on the
packet plane
1:1 LMSP
Synchroni
zation
Each line port provides one channel of SDH line clock

signals.
Each board supports two channels of E1 clock signals

over its STM-1 ports.
DCN
Maintenan
ce features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Clock source
NOTE
A CQ1 board and a TDM service board, such as SL1D/SL1Q,
cannot be configured into the same 1:1 LMSP protection group.
SDH line
clock
Supported
Outband
DCN
Each SDH line port can provide one data communications

channel (DCC) that is composed of three DCC bytes or nine
DCC bytes.
Inband DCN
Transmits DCN information over ML-PPP links.
Loopback
Supports inloops at STM-1 ports.
Supports outloops at STM-1 ports.
Supports inloops over E1 channels.
Supports outloops over E1 channels.
Warm and
cold resetting
Supported
Switching a
laser on or off
Supported
Pseudo
random
binary
sequence
(PRBS)
testing
Not supported
Manufacturer
information
querying
Supported

130

Transmission System
Description
Power
consumption
querying
Supported
SFP module
information
detecting and
querying
Supported

This section describes how the function units of a CQ1 board process channelized STM-1
optical signals.

Figure 4-13 CQ1 board function block diagram
Backplane
Channelized
STM-1 signal
Signal
access unit
STM-1
signal
SDH
processing
unit
E1
signal
Packet
processing
unit
GE
signal
Logic
processing
unit
GE
bus
Control bus
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
Line clock signal
Line clock signal

Clock unit
Clock signal provided to

+3.3 V power
supplied to the board
Power supply
unit
System clock signal
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
System power
System power
-48 V/-60 V

Table 4-65 Signal processing in the receive direction of a CQ1 board
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Receives channelized STM-1 signals.
Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.
Checks for R_LOS alarms.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

131

Transmission System
Step
Function Unit
SDH processing unit
Packet processing
unit
Logic processing
unit
Processing Flow
Converts STM-1 optical signals into STM-1

electrical signals.
Synchronizes frames and checks for R_LOS and

R_LOF alarms.
Descrambles signals.
Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates alarms and

performance events, if any.
Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and

generates alarms and performance events, if any.
Checks for changes in Synchronization Status

Messages (SSMs) in the S1 byte and reports the
SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes

(including F1 and serial bytes), DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the bytes to the logic processing
unit.
Adjusts AU pointers and generates performance

events, if any.
Checks higher order path overheads and generates

alarms and performance events, if any.
Decapsulates E1 signals from the STM-1 signals.
Frames E1 signals.
Performs CES emulation.
Performs Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol

(MP-PPP) processing.
Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts them into

Ethernet services.
Grooms services from service buses to the GE bus

on the backplane.
Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Table 4-66 Signal processing in the transmit direction of a CQ1 board
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit.
Grooms services from the GE bus on the backplane

to service buses.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

132

Transmission System
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Packet processing
unit
Decapsulates service signals.
Restructures CES packets.
Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1

signals to the SDH processing unit.
Multiplexes E1 signals into STM-1 signals.
Sets higher order path overheads.
Sets AU pointers.
Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
Scrambles signals.
SDH processing unit
Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

The CQ1 board is directly controlled by a CPU on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU issues configuration and query commands to other units of the board over the
control bus. These units send command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit receives two -48 V/-60 V power supplies from the backplane. It then
converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power and supplies the +3.3 V power to other
units on the board.
Clock Unit
The clock unit performs the following operations:
Extracts line clock signals or E1 clock signals and transmits them to the system control
and communication unit.
Receives system clock signals from the control bus on the backplane and supplies clock
signals to other units on the board.
4.6.4 Front Panel

A CQ1 board has indicators and STM-1 ports on its front panel.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

133

Transmission System
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-14 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing optical ports
OUT1
1
Q
C
1 2
T
A V S S
T R O O
S S L L
3
S
O
L
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
OUT4
IN4
4
S
O
L
Figure 4-15 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing electrical ports

OUT1
1
Q
C
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
1 2 3 4
T
A V S S S S
T R O O O O
S S L L L L
Indicators
The front panel of the CQ1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3,
and LOS4. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-67 Ports on a CQ1 board
Port
Description
Connector Type
OUT1 to OUT4
Transmit ports of the

first to fourth
STM-1 ports
IN1 to IN4
Receive ports of the

first to fourth
STM-1 ports
LC (with an SFP
optical module)
OUT
16.1 Fiber
Jumper for SFP
optical modules
16.6 STM-1
Cable for SFP
electrical
modules
IN
SAA straight
female (with an
SFP electrical
module)
OUT
Required Cable
IN
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the CQ1.

None.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

134

Transmission System
4.6.6 Valid Slots

A CQ1 board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 6. The priorities of the slots are as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. Its logical slot on the network management
system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.
4.6.7 Feature Code

indicates the type of optical port. CQ1 boards have feature codes.
Table 4-68 Feature codes of the CQ1
Feature Code
01
S-1.1, eSFP optical module
02
L-1.1, eSFP optical module
03
04
S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1 and

2, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is
1550 nm; for optical ports 3 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm
and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm.)

This section describes board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port
performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.
Table 4-69 lists the technical specifications of the CQ1.
Table 4-69 Technical specifications of the CQ1
Item
Service ports
Performance
Electrical
port
See Table 4-70.
Optical port
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.47 kg
Power consumption
11.5 W

Item
Value
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

135

Transmission System
Item
Value
Code pattern
CMI
Connector
SAA straight female

the input port
port
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
(km)
15
40
80
range (nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
-10

(dB)
8.2
10
10
NOTE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

136

Transmission System
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1
L-1.1
(km)
15
40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

137

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
SDH Boards
About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 550 supports the following SDH boards: SL1S, SL1D, SL1Q, SL4S, SL4D,
and SL16S.
SL1S, SL4S, and SL16S are integrated on the PCX or CXL board.
5.1
SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.

5.2
SL1Q
The SL1Q is a 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.

5.3
SL4D
The SL4D is a 2xSTM-4 optical interface board.
5.1 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.

The functional version of the SL1D is TNH2.

The SL1D receives/transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for
STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on
the line.
Table 5-1 lists the functions and features that the SL1D supports.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

138

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-1 Functions and features that the SL1D supports

Function and
Feature
Board
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Optical port
specifications
Provides S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports. STM-1 optical ports
The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957.
Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical modules can be used.
Pluggable optical modules support hot swapping.
Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used, their information

can be queried, and their running status can be monitored. This
facilitates your maintenance.
Optical ports allow setting the on/off state of a laser and support
the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
DCN
Supports outband DCN.
Service
processing
Processes VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services.
Overhead
processing
Processes the section overheads of STM-1 signals.
Transparently transmits or terminates path overheads.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Supports two-fiber unidirectional ring multiplex section protection

(MSP).
Supports linear MSP.
Supports sub-network connection protection (SNCP).
Optical module
specifications
Line clock source
Supports two channels of SDH line clock signals.
Maintenance
features
Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick fault locating
Setting of overhead bytes to be sent/received
Enabling/Disabling SSMs on line optical ports
Pass-through tests of line K bytes
Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and degrade

thresholds
Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact
on services)
Hot board swapping
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

139

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
5 SDH Boards
Board
ALS

The SL1D consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control
unit, and a clock unit.

Figure 5-2 Functional block diagram of the SL1D
Backplane
STM-1
O/E conversion
processing
Service bus
Overhead
unit
unit
Overhead bus
STM-1
Control bus
Logic
control
unit
Power supplied to the

Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
+3.3 V

Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 5-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
O/E conversion unit
Detects R_LOS alarms.

electrical signals.
Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF

alarms.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Overhead processing
unit

140

Transmission System
Step
Function Unit
5 SDH Boards
Processing Flow
Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific

alarms and performance events.

generates specific alarms and performance events.
Detects changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and

reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.

including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and
transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system
Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific

performance events.

specific alarms and performance events.
Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4

signals to the cross-connect unit.

Table 5-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Overhead processing
unit
Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals

from the cross-connect unit.
Sets AU pointers.
Scrambles signals.
O/E conversion unit

unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board
over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance
events to the CPU unit over the control bus.
control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

141

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Clock Unit
5.1.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 5-2 shows the front panel of the SL1D.
Figure 5-3 Front panel of the SL1D
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
SL1D
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV
TX1/RX1
SL1D
TX2/RX2
Indicators
The front panel of the SL1D has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, and LOS2. For
Ports
Table 5-4 Ports on an SL1D board
Port
Descripti
on
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
TX1/R
X1
Receive/Tr
ansmit port
of the first
STM-1
optical/elec
trical port
Optical port: LC SFP optical

module
TX represents
the transmit
port.
RX represents
the receive
port.
TX2/R
X2
Receive/Tr
ansmit port
of the
second
STM-1
optical/elec
trical port
TX
RX
Electrical port: SFP electrical

module
TX
RX
Required
Cable
SFP optical
port: 16.1
Fiber
Jumper
SFP
electrical
port: 16.6
STM-1
Cable
Labels
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

142

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards

None.
5.1.6 Valid Slots

The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The logical slots of the SL1D on the
NMS are the same as its physical slots.
5.1.7 Feature Code

indicates the type of optical port. SL1D boards have feature codes.
Table 5-5 Feature codes of the SL1D
Feature Code
01
02
03
04
S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical port 1, the

transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310
nm; for optical port 2, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the
receive wavelength is 1550 nm.)
05
L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical port 1, the


Table 5-6 lists the technical specifications of the SL1D.
Table 5-6 Technical specifications of the SL1D
Item
Service
ports
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Performance
TX1/RX
1
Receive/Transmit port of the

first STM-1 optical/electrical
port
For the performance of STM-1

optical ports, see Table 5-8 and
Table 5-9.
TX2/RX
2

second STM-1 optical/electrical

electrical ports, see Table 5-7.

143

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Item
Performance
port
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.30 kg
Power consumption
3.5 W

Item
Value
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Code pattern
CMI
Connector
SAA straight female
Permitted frequency deviation at the

input port
Allowed attenuation at the input port
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
(km)
15
40
80
range (nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
-10
8.2
10
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

144

Transmission System
Item
5 SDH Boards
Value
(dB)
NOTE
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1
L-1.1
(km)
15
40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
10
5.2 SL1Q
The SL1Q is a 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

145

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards

The functional version of SL1Q boards is TNH2.

The SL1Q receives/transmits 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for
STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on
the line.
Table 5-10 lists the functions and features that the SL1Q supports.
Table 5-10 Functions and features that the SL1Q supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Optical port
specifications
Provides S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports. STM-1 optical ports
The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957.
Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical modules can be used.
Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used and the running

status can be monitored. This facilitates your maintenance.
Optical ports allow setting the on/off state of a laser and support
the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
Optical module
specifications
DCN
Service
processing
Processes VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services.
Overhead
processing
Processes the section overheads of STM-1 signals.
Processes higher order path overheads.
Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and pass-through.
Provides transparent DCCs and orderwire byte channels.
Pointer processing
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Supports two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP.
Supports SNCP.
Line clock source
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports four channels of SDH line clock signals.

146

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Function and
Feature
Board
Maintenance
features
Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick fault locating
Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and degrade

thresholds
on services)
Hot board swapping
ALS

The SL1Q consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control
Figure 5-4 SL1Q board function block diagram
Backplane
STM-1
O/E conversion
processing
Service bus
Overhead
unit
unit
Overhead bus
STM-1
Control bus
Logic
control
unit
Power supplied to the

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
+3.3 V
Clock unit

System clock signal
147

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards

Table 5-11 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1Q
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
O/E conversion unit

electrical signals.

alarms.



communication unit.


performance events.


Overhead processing
unit

Table 5-12 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1Q
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Overhead processing
unit

Sets AU pointers.
Scrambles signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

148

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
O/E conversion unit

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the system control and
communication unit.
Clock Unit
5.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 5-5 Front panel of the SL1Q
TX3/RX3
SL1Q
SRV
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
LOS3
LOS4
TX1/RX1
TX4/RX4
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX2/RX2
Indicators
The front panel of the SL1Q has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3,
and LOS4. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 5-13 Ports on an SL1Q board
Port
Description
Connector Type
Pin
Assignm
ent
TX1/R
X1
Receive/Transmi
t port of the first
STM-1
optical/electrical
port
STM-1/4/16 optical port: LC

SFP optical module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
TX
RX

TX
represe
nts the
transmi
t port.
Required
Cable
SFP optical
port: 16.1 Fiber
Jumper
SFP electrical
port: 16.6
149

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Port
Description
Connector Type
Pin
Assignm
ent
TX2/R
X2
Receive/Transmi
t port of the
second STM-1
optical/electrical
port
STM-1 electrical port: SFP

electrical module
TX3/R
X3
Receive/Transmi
t port of the third
STM-1
optical/electrical
port
TX4/R
X4
Receive/Transmi
t port of the
fourth STM-1
optical/electrical
port
TX
RX
RX
represe
nts the
receive
port.
Required
Cable
STM-1 Cable
Labels

The SL1Q does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
5.2.6 Valid Slots

The SL1Q can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis.
5.2.7 Feature Code

indicates the type of optical port. SL1Q boards have feature codes.
Table 5-14 Feature codes of the SL1Q
Feature Code
01
02
03
04
S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1

and 3, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

150

Transmission System
Feature Code
5 SDH Boards

is 1310 nm; for optical ports 2 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1310
nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.)
05
L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1

and 3, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength
is 1310 nm; for optical ports 2 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1310
nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.)

This section describes the board specifications, including the optical port performance,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 5-15 lists the technical specifications of the SL1Q.
Table 5-15 Technical specifications of the SL1Q
Item
Service
ports
Performance
TX1/RX
1

first STM-1 optical/electrical
port

Table 5-18.
TX2/RX
2

second STM-1 optical/electrical
port

electrical ports, see Table 5-16.
TX3/RX
3

third STM-1 optical/electrical
port
TX4/RX
4

fourth STM-1 optical/electrical
port
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.30 kg
Power consumption
4.5 W

Item
Value
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Code pattern
CMI
Connector
SAA straight female
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

151

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Item
Value

the input port
port
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
(km)
15
40
80
range (nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
-10

(dB)
8.2
10
10
NOTE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

152

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1
L-1.1
(km)
15
40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
10
5.3 SL4D
The SL4D is a 2xSTM-4 optical interface board.

The functional version of the SL4D is TNH2.

The SL4D receives/transmits 2xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for STM-4
optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on the line.
Table 5-19 lists the functions and features that the SL4D supports.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

153

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-19 Functions and features that the SL4D supports

Board
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits 2xSTM-4 optical signals.
Optical port specifications
Provides S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 optical ports.
The characteristics of all optical ports comply

with ITU-T G.957.
Optical module information can be detected and

queried.
Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical

modules can be used.
Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used,

their information can be queried, and their
running status can be monitored. This facilitates
your maintenance.
Allows setting the on/off state of a laser and

supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
DCN
Service processing
Processes VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and

VC-4-4c concatenated services.
Overhead processing
Processes the section overheads of STM-4

signals.
Processes higher order path overheads.
Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and

pass-through.
Provides transparent DCCs and orderwire byte

channels.
Pointer processing
Alarms and performance events
Provides various alarms and performance events,

facilitating equipment management and
maintenance.
Protection schemes
Supports two-fiber unidirectional/bidirectional

ring MSP.
Supports SNCP.
Optical module specifications
Line clock source
Supports two channels of SDH line clock signals.
Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick

fault locating
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

154

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Board
Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and

degrade thresholds
Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets

having no impact on services)
Hot board swapping
ALS

The SL4D consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control

Figure 5-6 Functional block diagram of the SL4D
Backplane
STM-4
O/E conversion
Service bus
processing
Overhead
unit
unit
Overhead bus
STM-4
Control bus
Logic
control
unit

units on the board
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
+3.3 V
Clock unit

System clock signal
155

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards

Table 5-20 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL4D
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
O/E conversion unit
Converts STM-4 optical signals into electrical

signals.

alarms.



communication unit.


performance events.


Overhead processing
unit

Table 5-21 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL4D
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Overhead processing
unit

Sets AU pointers.
Scrambles signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

156

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
O/E conversion unit

control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
5.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 5-6 shows the front panel of the SL4D.
Figure 5-7 Front panel of the SL4D
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
SL4D
SRV
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
Indicators
The front panel of the SL4D has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, and LOS2. For
Ports
Table 5-22 Ports on an SL4D board
Port
Descripti
on
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
Required
Cable
TX1/R
X1
Receive/Tr
ansmit port
of the first
STM-4
TX represents
the transmit
port.
16.1 Fiber
Jumper
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

157

Transmission System
Port
Descripti
on
optical port
TX2/R
X2
5 SDH Boards
Connector Type
TX
RX
Receive/Tr
ansmit port
of the
second
STM-4
optical port
Pin Assignment
Required
Cable
RX represents
the receive
port.
Labels

None.
5.3.6 Valid Slots

The SL4D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The logical slots of the SL4D on the
NMS are the same as its physical slots.
5.3.7 Feature Code

indicates the type of optical port. SL4D boards have feature codes.
Table 5-23 Feature codes of the SL4D
Feature Code
01
02
03
04
S-4.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical port 1, the


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

158

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-24 lists the technical specifications of the SL4D.

Table 5-24 Technical specifications of the SL4D
Item
Service
ports
Performance
TX1/RX
1

first STM-4 optical port
TX2/RX
2

second STM-4 optical port

Table 5-26.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.30 kg
Power consumption
3.7 W
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
15
40
80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
(dBm)
-28
-28
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-8
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

159

Transmission System
Item
5 SDH Boards
Value
NOTE
Paramete
r
Value
Nominal
bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Type of
optical
interface
S-4.1
L-4.1
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
15
40
Type of
fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490
1310
1490
1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310
1490
1310
1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5
-23
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

160

Transmission System
5 SDH Boards
Paramete
r
Value
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

161

Transmission System
6 PDH Boards
PDH Boards
About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 550 supports PDH boards SP3D and PL3T.
6.1
SP3D
The SP3D is a 42xE1/T1 electrical interface board.

6.2
PL3T
The PL3T is a 3xE3/T3 electrical interface board.
6.1 SP3D
The SP3D is a 42xE1/T1 electrical interface board.

The functional version of the SP3D is TNH2.

The SP3D processes E1/T1 signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance events,
and maintenance features.
Table 6-1 lists the functions and features that the SP3D supports.
Table 6-1 Functions and features that the SP3D supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Service
processing
Receives/Transmits and processes 42xE1/T1 signals.
Overhead
processing
Processes path overheads at the VC-12 level such as J2 and V5.
Alarms and
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

162

Transmission System
6 PDH Boards
Function and
Feature
Board
performance
events
Tributary clock
sources
Extracts clock signals from the first and seventeenth channels.
Supports the tributary retiming function.
Transmits E1 clock signals transparently.
Inloops and outloops at electrical ports
on services)
PRBS tests
Maintenance
features
TPS protection
Not supported

The SP3D consists of an interface unit, a CODEC unit, a mapping/demapping unit, a logic
control unit, and a power supply unit.

Figure 6-2 Functional block diagram of the SP3D
Backplane
E1/T1
signal
E1/T1
Interface
unit
CODEC
unit
Mapping/De
mapping unit
Service bus
Cross-connect unit
E1/T1
Logic
control unit
Control
bus
to the board
Power
supply unit
Fuse
System control and

communication unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Clock unit

System power supply

System power supply
System clock signal
163

Transmission System
6 PDH Boards

Table 6-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3D
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Interface unit
Couples external E1/T1 signals by using a transformer

and then transmits the signals to the board.
CODEC unit
Equalizes the received signals.
Detects T_ALOS alarms.
Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.
Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form

one TUG-2.
Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to

form one TUG-3.
Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form

one C-4.
Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to

form one VC-4.
Processes clock signals.
Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication

signals to the active and standby cross-connect units.
Mapping/Demappin
g unit
Logic processing
unit

Table 6-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3D
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit

Mapping/Demappin
g unit
Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
Processes path overheads and pointers and detects

Extracts E1/T1 signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
CODEC unit

164

Transmission System
6 PDH Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Interface unit
Couples E1/T1 signals by using a transformer and then

transmits the signals to an external cable.

Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
6.1.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the SP3D.
Figure 6-3 Front panel of the SP3D
21
SP3D
STAT
SRV
42
22
SP3D
Indicators
The front panel of the SP3D has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

165

Transmission System
6 PDH Boards
Ports
Table 6-4 Ports on an SP3D board
Port
Descripti
on
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
Required
Cable
1-21
Receives/T
ransmits
the first to
twenty-firs
t E1/T1
signals.
Anea 96
See Table 6-5.
16.8
21xE1/T1
Cable
22-42
POS.1
Receives/T
ransmits
the
twenty-sec
ond to
forty-secon
d E1/T1
signals.
POS.96
Table 6-5 Pin assignments for an Anea 96 port

Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal

25

signal (+)

26

signal (-)

27


28


29

signal (+)

30

signal (-)

31


32


33

signal (+)
10
34
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

166

Transmission System
Pin
Signal
6 PDH Boards
Pin
Signal
signal (-)
11

35

signal (+)
12

36

signal (-)
13

37

14

38

15

39

16

40

17

41

signal (+)
18

42

signal (-)
19

43

signal (+)
20

44

signal (-)
21

45

22

46

23

47

24

48

49

73

50

74

51

75

52

76

53

77

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

167

Transmission System
6 PDH Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
54

78

55

79

56

80

57
The seventeenth received E1

81
The seventeenth transmitted E1

58
The seventeenth received E1

82
The seventeenth transmitted E1

59
The eighteenth received E1

83
The eighteenth transmitted E1

60
The eighteenth received E1

84
The eighteenth transmitted E1

61
The nineteenth received E1

85
The nineteenth transmitted E1

62
The nineteenth received E1

86
The nineteenth transmitted E1

63
The twentieth received E1

87
The twentieth transmitted E1

64
The twentieth received E1

88
The twentieth transmitted E1

65
The twenty-first received E1

89
The twenty-first transmitted E1

66
The twenty-first received E1

90
The twenty-first transmitted E1


None.
6.1.6 Valid Slots

The SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the SP3D on the NMS are the
same as its physical slots.
6.1.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the SP3D indicates the E1/T1 port impedance.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

168

Transmission System
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-6 Feature codes of the SP3D

Feature Code
Port Impedance (Ohm)
120
75

Table 6-7 lists the technical specifications of the SP3D.
Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the SP3D
Item
Service
ports
Performance
1-21
Receives/Transmits the first to

twenty-first E1/T1 signals.
22-42
Receives/Transmits the
twenty-second to forty-second
E1/T1 signals.
See Table 6-8.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.85 kg
Power consumption
11.9 W
Table 6-8 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports
Electrical Port Type
1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Code pattern
B8ZS code, AMI code
HDB3 code
Waveform at the output port
Signal bit rate at the output

port
Allowed attenuation at the
input port
Permitted frequency deviation
at the input port
Complies with ITU-T

G.824.
Complies with ITU-T

G.823.
Anti-interference capability at
the input port
Complies with ITU-T

G.703.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

169

Transmission System
6 PDH Boards
Electrical Port Type
1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Reflection attenuation at the

input and output ports
Complies with ITU-T

G.703.
Output jitter
Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824.
Mapping jitter
Combined jitter
Jitter transfer function
Port type
Anea 96
Complies with ITU-T

G.742.
6.2 PL3T
The PL3T is a 3xE3/T3 electrical interface board.

The functional version of PL3T boards is TNH2.

The PL3T processes E3/T3 signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance events,
and maintenance features.
Table 6-9 lists the functions and features that the PL3T supports.
Table 6-9 Functions and features that the PL3T supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Service
processing
Receives/Transmits and processes 3xE3/T3 signals.
Overhead
processing
Sets and queries all path overheads at the VC-3 level.
Alarms and
performance
events

Tributary clock
sources
Extracts clock signals from the first and second channels.
Maintenance
features
Inloops and outloops at electrical ports
on services)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

170

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
6 PDH Boards
Board
PRBS tests
Hot board swapping

The PL3T consists of an interface unit, a CODEC unit, a mapping/demapping unit, and a
logic control unit.
This section describes how the PL3T processes one E3/T3 signal, and it serves as an example
to describe the working principle and signal flow of the PL3T. Figure 6-3 shows the
functional block diagram of the PL3T.
Figure 6-4 Functional block diagram of the PL3T
Backplane
E3/T3
signal
E3/T3
CODEC
unit
Interface
unit
Service bus
Mapping/De
mapping unit
Cross-connect unit
E3/T3
Control
bus
Logic
control unit

units on the board
System control and

communication unit
+3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 6-10 Signal processing in the receive direction of the PL3T
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Interface unit
Couples external E3/T3 signals by using a transformer

and then transmits the signals to the board.
CODEC unit
Equalizes the received signals.
Detects T_ALOS alarms.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

171

Transmission System
Step
3
Function Unit
Mapping/Demappin
g unit
Logic control unit
6 PDH Boards
Processing Flow
Asynchronously maps the signal into C-3.
Processes path overheads and forms the signal to be

VC-3.
Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-3.
One TU-3 is multiplexed into one TUG-3.
Three TU-3s are performed with byte interleaving

and are multiplexed into one C-4.
C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and

the VC-4 is formed.
Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication

signals to the active and standby cross-connect units.

Table 6-11 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the PL3T
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic control unit

Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
Demultiplexes one TU-3 from one TUG-3.
Demultiplexes one VC-3 from one TU-3.
Processes path overheads and pointers and detects

Extracts E3/T3 signals.
Mapping/Demappin
g unit
CODEC unit
Interface unit
Couples E3/T3 signals by using a transformer and then

transmits the signals to an external cable.

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the system control and
communication unit.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

172

Transmission System
6 PDH Boards
Clock Unit
6.2.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 6-4 shows the front panel of the PL3T.
Figure 6-5 Front panel of the PL3T
T
3
L
P
T
3
L
P
T
A V
T R
S S
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
Indicators
The front panel of the PL3T has the STAT and SRV indicators. For status explanation for the
indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The front panel of the PL3T has three electrical ports. Table 6-12 lists the types of the ports on
the PL3T and their respective usage.
Table 6-12 Ports on the PL3T
Port
Description
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
Required Cable
TX1TX3
Transmits the first

to third E3/T3
signals.
SMB
Inner core:
transmitting
data (+)
16.9 E3/T3 Cable
Outer core:
transmitting
data (-)
Inner core:
transmitting
data (+)
Outer core:
transmitting
data (-)
RX1RX3
Receives the first

to third E3/T3
signals.

The PL3T does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

173

Transmission System
6 PDH Boards
6.2.6 Valid Slots

The PL3T can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the PL3T on the NMS are the
6.2.7 Feature Code

PL3T boards do not have feature codes.

This section describes the board specifications, including the electrical port performance,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 6-13 lists the technical specifications of the PL3T.
Table 6-13 Technical specifications of the PL3T
Item
Service
ports
Performance
TX1-TX
3
Transmits the first to third E3/T3

signals.
RX1-R
X3
Receives the first to third E3/T3

signals.
See Table 6-14.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.30 kg
Power consumption
4.5 W
Table 6-14 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports
Item
Value
Bit rate
34368 kbit/s
44736 kbit/s
Code pattern
HDB3
B3ZS
Connector
SMB
SMB
Port impedance (ohm)
75
75

the input port
port
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Complies with
ITU-T G.823.

174

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards
EoS Boards
About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 550 supports EoS boards EFS8 and EGT1.
7.1
EFS8
The EFS8 is an 8xFE switching and processing board.

7.2
EGT1
The EGT1 is a 1xGE transparent transmission board.
7.1 EFS8
The EFS8 is an 8xFE switching and processing board.

The functional version of the EFS8 is TNH2.

The EFS8 supports the Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services, link capacity adjustment
scheme (LCAS), and test frames.
Table 7-1 lists the functions and features that the EFS8 supports.
Table 7-1 Functions and features that the EFS8 supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Basic functions
Processes 8xFE signals.
Port
specifications
Supports 10/100BASE-T(X) that complies with IEEE 802.3u.
Service frame
format
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p frames.
Supports a frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes,
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

175

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
7 EoS Boards
Board
and supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Maximum
upstream
bandwidth
4xVC-4
VCTRUNK
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 8
Configuration principles are as follows:

a.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with VC-12

paths or VC-3 paths. An NE can be
configured with a maximum of
3xVC-3+63xVC-12 or 12xVC-3.
b.
When VC-12 paths are to be bound,

VCTRUNKs 1-8 can be bound only with
VC4-4.
c.
When VC-3 paths are to be bound,

VCTRUNKs 1-8 can be bound with
VC4-1 to VC4-4.
Encapsulation
formats
HDLC, LAPS, GFP-F
Mapping
granularities
VC-12, VC-3, VC12-Xv (x 63), VC3-Xv (x 12)
Ethernet private
line (EPL)
Supports transparent transmission based on ports.
Ethernet virtual
private line
(EVPL)
Supports EVPL services based on port+VLAN.
Supports EVPL services carried by QinQ links.
Uses the frame encapsulation formats in compliance with IEEE

802.1q and IEEE 802.1ad.
Ethernet private
LAN (EPLAN)
Supports Layer 2 convergence and point-to-multipoint convergence.
Supports the forwarding function in Layer 2 switching, and also

supports the switching on both the user side and the SDH network
side.
Supports the self-learning of source MAC addresses. The size of a

MAC address table is 16 KB. You can set and query the aging time
of an MAC address entry.
Supports a maximum of 512 static MAC addresses and

configuration of static MAC routes.
Supports creation, deletion, and query of VBs. Only one VB is

supported. The VB supports a maximum of 16 logical ports.
Ethernet virtual
private LAN
(EVPLAN)
Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
Supports EVPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1q bridges

and IEEE 802.1ad bridges.
MTU
The MTU can be set to a value within the range of 1518 bytes to 9600
bytes. After the MTU setting takes effect, the maximum length of a
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

176

Transmission System
Function and
Feature
7 EoS Boards
Board
packet is restricted on an ingress IP port.
VLAN
Transparently transmits VLAN tags.
Multicast
Supported
Ethernet
operation,
administration
and maintenance
(ETH OAM)
Ethernet service OAM: supports continuity check (CC), loopback

(LB), and link trace (LT) tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag,
and supports OAM ping in compliance with the Huawei proprietary
protocol.

performance monitoring, fault checks, and remote loopbacks in
compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and supports loop checks in
compliance with the Huawei proprietary protocol.
QoS
Supported
Flow control
function
Supports port-based IEEE 802.3x flow control.
LCAS
In compliance with ITU-T G.7042, LCAS dynamically increases or

decreases bandwidths and protects bandwidths.
Ethernet test
frames
Transmits and receives Ethernet test frames.
Port mirroring
Supported
Loopback types
Supports inloops at the MAC layer and PHY layer and inloops on VC-3
paths.
LAG
Supported
LPT
Supports point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT.
STP/RSTP
Supported
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
(RMON)
Supports port-level Ethernet performance monitoring.
Alarms and
performance
events
Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment

management and maintenance.
Board
temperature
detection
Supported

The EFS8 consists of an Ethernet access unit, an encapsulation/mapping unit, a logic control
unit, a power supply unit, and a clock unit.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

177

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards
This section describes how the EFS8 processes one FE signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the EFS8. Figure 7-1 shows the function
block diagram of the EFS8.
Figure 7-2 Function block diagram of the EFS8
Backplane
a
cc
e
ss
u
n
it
FE
FE
M
a
p
p
in
g
u
n
it
E
th
e
rn
e
t
E
n
ca
p
su
la
tio
n
/
Control bus
to the board
Power
supply unit
Service bus
Logic
control unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Cross-connect unit
System control and

communication unit
System power supply

System power supply
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 7-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFS8
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Ethernet access unit
Receives/Transmits FE signals.

conversion for FE signals.

CRC checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.
Encapsulates and maps signals.
Transmits encapsulated data to the cross-connect

unit over the service bus.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Encapsulation/Mapp
ing unit

178

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards

Table 7-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFS8
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Encapsulation/Mapp
ing unit
Receives signals from the cross-connect unit.
Demaps and decapsulates signals.
Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition,

CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement.

Ethernet data frames.
Sends out the generated FE signals through Ethernet

ports.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet access unit and the encapsulation/mapping unit
over the control bus on the board.
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
7.1.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 7-2 shows the front panel of the EFS8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

179

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards
Figure 7-3 Front panel of the EFS8
EFS8
STAT
SRV
PROG
EFS8
1
Indicators
The front panel of the EFS8 has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, and SRV. For status
Ports
Table 7-4 Description of the ports
Port
Descriptio
n
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
Required
Cable
1-4
Receives
and
transmits
the first to
fourth FE
signals.
RJ45
16.10 Network
Cable
Receives
and
transmits
the fifth to
eighth FE
signals.
The ports support

MDI and MDI-X
modes. For details
about the pin
assignments for the
ports, see Table 7-6
and Table 7-7.
For status explanation for

the indicators of an RJ45
port, see Table 7-5.
5-8
87654321

Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On

properly.
Off
On or blinking

data.
Off

transmitting data.
ACT (yellow)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

180

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards

Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)

Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

181

Transmission System
Pin
7 EoS Boards
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Signal
Function
Function
(-)

The EFS8 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.1.6 Valid Slots

The EFS8 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
7.1.7 Feature Code

EFS8 boards do not have feature codes.

This section describes the board specifications, including the parameters specified for
electrical ports, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 7-8 lists the technical specifications of the EFS8.
Table 7-8 Technical specifications of the EFS8
Item
Performance
Service ports
FE electrical port
See Table 7-9.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.65 kg
Power consumption
13.0 W
Table 7-9 Specifications of the EFS8 Ethernet electrical ports

Service Port
Port Rate
Code Pattern
Port Type
FE electrical
port
10BASE-T
Manchester coding
signals
RJ45
100BASE-TX
MLT-3 encoding
signal
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

182

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards
7.2 EGT1
The EGT1 is a 1xGE transparent transmission board.

The functional version of the EGT1 is TNH2.

The EGT1 supports the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, link capacity
adjustment scheme (LCAS), and test frames.
Table 7-10 lists the functions and features that the EGT1 supports.
Table 7-10 Functions and features that the EGT1 supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Basic functions
Transparently transmits 1xGE signals.
Port
specifications
Provides one
1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
Ethernet optical port that supports auto-negotiation and complies
with IEEE 802.3z; uses hot-swappable SFP optical modules.
Supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface. The

electrical interface supports the 1000M full-duplex working mode;
uses hot-swappable SFP electrical modules.
The GE optical port supports single-fiber bidirectional optical

modules.
Service frame
format
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p frames.
Supports a frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes,

and supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Maximum
upstream
bandwidth
8xVC-4
VCTRUNK
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 1
Configuration principles are as follows:
Encapsulation
formats
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
a.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a

maximum of 63 VC-12 paths, 24 VC-3
paths, or eight VC-4 paths.
b.
When VC-12 paths are to be bound, a

VCTRUNK can be bound only with
VC4-4.
c.
When VC-3 paths are to be bound, a

VCTRUNK can be bound with VC4-1 to
VC4-8.
HDLC, LAPS, GFP-F

183

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards
Function and
Feature
Board
Mapping
granularities
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC12-Xv (X 63), VC3-Xv (X 24), VC4-Xv

(X 8)
Ethernet private
line (EPL)
Supports port-based transparent transmission.
MTU
The MTU can be set to a value within the range of 1518 bytes to 9600
bytes. After the MTU setting takes effect, the maximum length of a
packet is restricted on an ingress IP port.
VLAN
Transparently transmits VLAN tags.
LPT
Supports point-to-point LPT.
Multicast
Not supported
Ethernet
operation,
administration
and maintenance
(ETH OAM)
Supports continuity check (CC), loopback (LB), and link trace (LT)
tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
QoS
Not supported
Flow control
function
Supports port-based IEEE 802.3x flow control.
LCAS
In compliance with ITU-T G.7042, LCAS dynamically increases or

decreases bandwidths and protects bandwidths.
Ethernet test
frames
Transmits and receives Ethernet test frames.
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
(RMON)
Supports port-level Ethernet performance monitoring.
Alarms and
performance
events
Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment

management and maintenance.
Board
temperature
detection
Supported

The EGT1 consists of an Ethernet access unit, an encapsulation/mapping unit, a logic control
unit, a power supply unit, and a clock unit.
Figure 7-3 shows the function block diagram of the EGT1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

184

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards
Figure 7-4 Function block diagram of the EGT1

Backplane
a
c
c
e
s
s
u
n
it
GE
GE
M
a
p
p
in
g
u
n
it
E
th
e
rn
e
t
E
n
c
a
p
s
u
la
ti
o
n
/
Control bus
to the board
Power
supply unit
Service bus
Logic
control unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Clock unit
Cross-connect unit
System control and

communication unit
System power supply

System power supply
System clock signal

Table 7-11 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EGT1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Receives/Transmits GE signals and performs O/E

conversion.

conversion for GE signals.

CRC checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.
Encapsulates and maps signals.
Transmits encapsulated data to the cross-connect

unit over the service bus.
Encapsulation/Mapp
ing unit

Table 7-12 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EGT1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Encapsulation/Mapp
ing unit
Receives signals from the cross-connect unit.
Demaps and decapsulates signals.
Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition,

CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

185

Transmission System
Step
7 EoS Boards
Function Unit
Processing Flow
measurement.

Ethernet data frames.
Sends out the generated GE signals through Ethernet

ports.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet access unit and the encapsulation/mapping unit
over the control bus on the board.
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
7.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and an optical port on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 7-5 Front panel of the EGT1
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
EGT1
ACT
SRV
LINK
OPM
STAT
TX1/RX1
EGT1
Indicators
The front panel of the EGT1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LINK, ACT, and OPM.
For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

186

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards
Ports
Table 7-13 Description of the port
Port
Description
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
Required
Cable
TX1/
RX1
Receives and
transmits GE
signals.
TX represents
the transmit
port.
16.1 Fiber
Jumper
RX represents
the receive port.
TX
RX
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.

The EGT1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.2.6 Valid Slots

The EGT1 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
7.2.7 Feature Code

indicates the type of optical port. EGT1 boards have feature codes.
Table 7-14 Feature code of the EGT1
Feature Code
01
1000BASE-LX, operating at 1310 nm
03
1000BASE-LX, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The

nm.)
04
1000BASE-LX, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The

nm.)

This section describes the board specifications, including the parameters specified for optical
ports, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

187

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards
Table 7-15 lists the technical specifications of the EGT1.

Table 7-15 Technical specifications of the EGT1
Item
Service
ports
Performance
GE1,
GE2
GE electrical port
GE optical port
See Table 7-17, Table 7-18, and

Table 7-19.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.60 kg
Power consumption
8.3 W
Table 7-16 Specifications of the EGT1 Ethernet electrical ports

Service Port
Port Rate
Code Pattern
Port Type
GE electrical
port
1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5 coding
signals
RJ45

Item
Value
Optical port
type
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
1000BASE-ZX
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5
10
40
80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17
-20
-23
-23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

188

Transmission System
Item
Value
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
7 EoS Boards
Paramete
r
Value
Type of
optical
interface
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
10
40
Type of
fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490
1310
1490
1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310
1490
1310
1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5
-23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

189

Transmission System
7 EoS Boards
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
1488095.00
9.00
0.00
7440475.00
128.00
844595.00
11.80
0.00
4222975.00
256.00
452899.00
17.30
0.00
2264495.00
512.00
234962.00
25.00
0.00
1174810.00
1024.00
119732.00
29.20
0.00
598660.00
1280.00
96154.00
31.30
0.00
480770.00
1518.00
81274.00
33.40
0.00
406370.00
2000.00
61881.00
37.40
0.00
309405.00
9600.00
12994.00
98.00
0.00
64970.00
Item
Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us)
Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00
1488095.00
7.00
0.00
7440475.00
128.00
844595.00
7.40
0.00
4222975.00
256.00
452899.00
8.40
0.00
2264495.00
512.00
234962.00
10.60
0.00
1174810.00
1024.00
119732.00
14.70
0.00
598660.00
1280.00
96154.00
17.00
0.00
480770.00
1518.00
81274.00
18.90
0.00
406370.00
2000.00
61881.00
22.60
0.00
309405.00
9600.00
12994.00
83.40
0.00
64970.00
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

190

Transmission System
8 WDM Board
WDM Board
About This Chapter

The OpitX OSN 550 can house the DMD2 board (WDM board).
8.1
DMD2
DMD2 is a bidirectional double channel optical add/drop multiplexing board.
8.1 DMD2
DMD2 is a bidirectional double channel optical add/drop multiplexing board.

The functional version of the DMD2 is TNM1.

The main functions and features supported by the DMD2 are adding/dropping and
multiplexing.
For detailed functions and features, see Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 Functions and features of the DMD2 board
Functions and
Features
Description
Basic Function
Adds/Drops in two directions two channels of wavelength signals

to/from the multiplexed signals respectively.
WDM
specifications
Supports both the DWDM and CWDM specifications.
DMD2 boards use passive optical components so their voltages do not affect services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

191

Transmission System
8 WDM Board

The DMD2 unit consists of two parts: the OADM module, the communication module.
Figure 8-1 shows the principle block diagram of the DMD2.
Figure 8-2 Principle block diagram of the DMD2
wD1 wD2
wA1
Drop
wIN
wA2
eA1 eA2
eD1 eD2
Add
Drop
Add
eIN
OADM
module
OADM
module
wOUT
eOUT
Communication module
SCC
Backplane or CTL
Signal Flow
In the east, the DMD2 board receives multiplexed signals through optical port eIN. After the
optical module processes the multiplexed signals, the board splits out two channels of optical
signals from the multiplexed signals and outputs them through optical port eD1 and eD2.
The board also receives through optical port eA1 and eA2 two channels of optical signals
and couples them to the multiplexed signals and outputs the coupled signals through eOUT.
The working principle of west signals is the same as that of east signals; while the signal
flows in the two directions are different.
Module Function
Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths respectively in two directions.
Communication module
Communicates with the SCC unit, to control and operate on each module of the unit.
8.1.4 Front Panel

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

192

Transmission System
8 WDM Board
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 8-3 Front panel of the DMD2
2
D
M
D
wIN wOUT wA1 wD1 wA2 wD2

1471
1491
eIN eOUT eA1 eD1 eA2 eD2

1471
1491
The number under the optical port indicates one of the wavelengths that are supported by the optical
port.
Indicators
The DMD2 board does not have indicators.
Ports
Table 8-2 Types and descriptions of the DMD2 ports
Port
Description
Connector
Type
Requir
ed
Cable
wIN/w
OUT
Receive or transmit the westward multiplexed

signal.
LC
wA1/
wA2
Receive the westward optical signals from the

OTU or integrated client-side equipment, thus
adding one westward channel respectively.
16.1
Fiber
Jumper
wD1/
wD2
Transmit the westward optical signals to the OTU

or integrated client-side equipment, thus dropping
one westward channel respectively.
eIN/e
OUT
Receive or transmit the eastward multiplexed

signal.
eA1/e
A2
Receive the eastward optical signals from the

OTU or integrated client-side equipment, thus
adding one eastward channel respectively.
eD1/e
D2
Transmit the eastward optical signals to the OTU

or integrated client-side equipment, thus dropping
one eastward channel respectively.

None.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

193

Transmission System
8 WDM Board
8.1.6 Valid Slots

The DMD2 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
8.1.7 Feature Code

None.

Specifications include optical specifications, mechanical specifications and power
consumption.
Table 8-3 lists the technical specifications of the DMD2.
Table 8-3 Technical specifications of the DMD2
Item
Value
Service ports
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.72 kg
Power consumption
0.5 W
Table 8-4 Optical port specifications for the DMD2 board in the dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) system
Optical port
Item
Value
Operating frequency
range (THz)
192.10 to 196.00
Adjacent channel
spacing (GHz)
100
eIN-eD1
1.0 dB spectral width

(nm)
0.2
Insertion loss on the

drop channel (dB)
< 1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation (dB)
> 30
Non-adjacent channel
isolation (dB)
> 40

(nm)
0.2

add channel (dB)
< 1.5
eIN-eD2
wIN-wD1
wIN-wD2
eA1-eOUT
eA2-eOUT
wA1-wOUT
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

194

Transmission System
Optical port
8 WDM Board
Item
Value
Insertion loss (dB)
< 2.2
Reflectance (dB)
< -40
wA2-wOUT
wIN-eOUT
eIN-wOUT
-
Table 8-5 Optical port specifications for the DMD2 board in the coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) system
Optical port
Item
Value
range (nm)
1471 to 1611
Adjacent channel
spacing (nm)
20
eIN-eD1

(nm)
13.0

drop channel (dB)
< 1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation (dB)
> 30
Non-adjacent channel
isolation (dB)
> 40

(nm)
13.0

add channel (dB)
< 1.5
wA2-wOUT
wIN-eOUT
Insertion loss (dB)
< 2.2
Reflectance (dB)
< -40
eIN-eD2
wIN-wD1
wIN-wD2
eA1-eOUT
eA2-eOUT
wA1-wOUT
eIN-wOUT
-
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

195

Transmission System
9 Auxiliary Boards
Auxiliary Boards
About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 550 supports the auxiliary boards AUX and FAN.
9.1 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary interface board that provides one orderwire phone port, one 64 kbit/s
synchronous transparent data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, and
alarm input/output ports.
9.2
FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat for the chassis by means of air cooling.
9.1 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary interface board that provides one orderwire phone port, one 64 kbit/s
synchronous transparent data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, and
alarm input/output ports.

The functional version of the AUX is TNM1.

The AUX provides one orderwire phone port, one external clock port, one 64 kbit/s
synchronous data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, and one outdoor
cabinet monitoring port.
Table 9-1 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.
Table 9-1 Functions and features that the AUX supports
Board
Synchronous/Asynchronous transparent
data port
Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous

transparent data port or 19.2 kbit/s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

196

Transmission System
9 Auxiliary Boards
Board
asynchronous transparent data port.
External clock port
Provides one 120-ohm, two-channel clock

input/output port for connecting to BITS.
External time port
Provides two external time input/output

ports.
Alarm input/output ports
Provides alarm ports with six inputs and two

outputs.
Outdoor cabinet monitoring port
Provides one outdoor cabinet monitoring

port (sharing one port physically with an
alarm input/output port) for monitoring the
temperature and humidity of an outdoor
cabinet.
Orderwire phone port
Provides one orderwire phone port so that

operation/maintenance engineers at different
workstations can have voice communication
with each other.

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the AUX.

Figure 9-2 Functional block diagram of the AUX
Backplane
Power
supply unit
Power dip detection signal
Synchronous/Asynchronous
transparent data port
6-input/2-output alarm ports
Orderwire
unit
Two-channel external clock/time port
Logic
control unit
System bus
+3.3 V
System control and

communication unit
Outdoor cabinet monitoring port
Clock unit
Clock Board status

signal detection unit
System control and

communication unit
Power Supply Unit
Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units
on the AUX.
Receives and shuts down control signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

197

Transmission System
9 Auxiliary Boards
Orderwire Unit
Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port or 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous
transparent data port.
Provides one orderwire phone port.
Provides 6-input/2-output alarm ports.
Provides one outdoor cabinet monitoring port.
Provides one two-channel external clock/time port.
Logic Control Unit
Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to control the
board.
Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
Provides board status information.
Checks the status of the active and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
Checks the status of the active and standby clocks.
Switches system clock reference sources automatically or by running specific

commands.
Detects and reports the status of the key clock for each board in the system.
Detects the presence of the key clock for each board in the system and reports specific
alarms if any key clock is found lost.
Board Status Detection Unit
Detects board performance data such as board temperature and voltage.
Controls power shut-down.
Stores and reads board manufacturing information.
Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
Clock Unit
9.1.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

AUX
STATSRV
F1/S1
PHONE
ALMO
ALMI
ALMI2/EXT
SYNC
TOD0
TOD1
Indicators
The front panel of the AUX has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

198

Transmission System
9 Auxiliary Boards
Ports
Table 9-2 Description of the ports on the AUX
Por
t
Descript
ion
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
F1/
S1
64 kbit/s
synchrono
us
transparen
t data port
or 19.2
kbit/s
asynchron
ous
transparen
t data port
RJ45
Pin 1: transmitting
asynchronous data signals
Pin 2: grounding end
Pin 3: receiving
asynchronous data signals
Pin 4: transmitting
synchronous data signals (+)
Pin 5: transmitting
synchronous data signals (-)
Pin 6: grounding end
Pin 7: receiving synchronous

data signals (+)
Pin 8: receiving synchronous

data signals (-)
Pin 1: not defined
Pin 2: not defined
Pin 3: not defined
Pin 4: orderwire call signal

(ring)
Pin 5: orderwire call signal

(tip)
Pin 6: not defined
Pin 7: not defined
Pin 8: not defined
Pin 1: the first external alarm

output signal (+)

output signal (-)
Pin 3: the second external

alarm output signal (+)

output signal (+)

output signal (-)

alarm output signal (-)

alarm output signal (+)
PH
ON
E
AL
MO
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Orderwire
phone
port
Alarm
output
port
87654321
For status
explanation for the
indicators of an
RJ45 port, see
Table 9-3.

Required
Cable
16.10
Network
Cable
199

Transmission System
Por
t
Descript
ion
Connector Type
9 Auxiliary Boards
Pin Assignment
Required
Cable
alarm output signal (-)

AL
MI1
AL
MI2
/EX
T
SY
NC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Alarm
input port
1 (four
inputs)
Alarm
input port
2 (two
inputs)/O
utdoor
cabinet
monitorin
g port
120-ohm,
two-chan
nel
external
clock
input/outp
ut port

input signal
Pin 2: grounding end for the

first alarm input signal

alarm input signal
Pin 4: the third external alarm

input signal

second alarm input signal

third alarm input signal
Pin 7: the fourth external

alarm input signal

fourth alarm input signal
Pin 1: the fifth external alarm

input signal

fifth alarm input signal
Pin 3: receiving outdoor

cabinet monitoring signal (-)
Pin 4: the sixth external

alarm input signal

sixth alarm input signal
Pin 6: receiving outdoor

cabinet monitoring signal (+)
Pin 7: transmitting outdoor

cabinet monitoring signal (-)
Pin 8: transmitting outdoor

cabinet monitoring signal (+)
Pin 1: differential signal

input of external clock 1 (-)

input of external clock 1 (+)

input of external clock 2 (+)

output of external clock 1 (-)

output of external clock 1 (+)

200

Transmission System
Por
t
Descript
ion
9 Auxiliary Boards
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
Required
Cable
input of external clock 2 (-)
TO
D0
TO
D1
External
time port
1
External
time port
2

output of external clock 2 (+)

output of external clock 2 (-)
Pin 1: not defined
Pin 2: not defined
Pin 3: 1pps differential

input/output signal (-)
Pin 4: GND
Pin 5: GND

input/output signal (+)
Pin 7: TOD differential


Pin 1: not defined
Pin 2: not defined

Pin 4: GND
Pin 5: GND




Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On

properly.
Off
On or blinking

data.
Off

transmitting data.
ACT (yellow)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

201

Transmission System
9 Auxiliary Boards

None.
9.1.6 Valid Slots

The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the
9.1.7 Feature Code

None.

Table 9-4 lists the technical specifications of the AUX.
Table 9-4 Technical specifications of the AUX
Item
Ports
Performance
F1/S1
64 kbit/s synchronous
transparent data port or 19.2
kbit/s asynchronous transparent
data port
PHONE
See Table 9-7.
ALMO
Alarm output port
Not involved
ALMI1
Alarm input port 1 (four

inputs)
Not involved
ALMI2/E
XT
Alarm input port 2 (two

inputs)/Outdoor cabinet
monitoring port
For the outdoor cabinet

monitoring port, seeTable 9-8.
SYNC
120-ohm, two-channel external

clock input/output port
See Table 9-9.
TOD0
External time port 1
See Table 9-10.
TOD1
External time port 2
See Table 9-10.
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x
225.80 mm
Weight
0.30 kg
Power consumption
2.2 W
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

202

Transmission System
9 Auxiliary Boards
Table 9-5 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's synchronous data ports
Item
Value
Transmission channel
Byte F1 in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s)
64
Port type
Codirectional
Port characteristics
In compliance with ITU-T G.703
Table 9-6 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's asynchronous data ports
Item
Value
User-defined byte in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s)
19.2
In compliance with RS-232
Table 9-7 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's orderwire ports

Item
Value
Bytes E1 and E2 in the SDH overhead
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Pair in each direction
One symmetrical pair
Impedance (ohm)
600
Table 9-8 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's outdoor cabinet monitoring ports
Item
Value
In compliance with RS-485
Table 9-9 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's external clock ports
Item
Value
External synchronous source
2048 kbit/s (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) or 2048 kHz

(in compliance with ITU-T G.703)
Frequency accuracy
In compliance with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in or pull-out range
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

203

Transmission System
Item
9 Auxiliary Boards
Value
Noise generation
Noise toleration
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
Synchronization clock
transfer accuracy
< 50 ppb
Table 9-10 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's external time ports
Item
Value
Port type
1PPS+TOD
DCLS
Electrical specifications
RS-422
Protocol type
1PPS+TOD: UBX and NMEA
DCLS: IRIG-B (DC)
9.2 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat for the chassis by means of air cooling.

The functional version of the FAN is TNM1.

The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
Table 9-11 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.
Table 9-11 Functions and features that the FAN supports
Board
Power input
Receives two +12 V power supplies from the active and

standby system control, switching, and timing boards. The
two +12 V power supplies provide 1+1 backup for each
other.
Number of fans
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

204

Transmission System
9 Auxiliary Boards
Board
Intelligent fan speed

adjustment
Adjusts the rotating speed automatically.
If one fan reports an alarm, the other fans are adjusted to

run at full speed.
Protection
Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans and

protects fans against overcurrent.
OM features
Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,

alarms, version number, and board in-position status.
Reports specific alarms when a fan fails or is aged.
Detects the power supply status of a fan, and reports

specific alarms when the power supplied to a fan fails.
Reports specific alarms when the FAN board is offline

and stops detecting fan status if the FAN board is
offline.
Supports hot board swapping.

The FAN consists of a fan unit, a power unit, and a communication monitoring unit.

Figure 9-3 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Backplane
Fan unit
+12 V
+12 V
Power unit
+12 V
Communication
detection signal
Communication
monitoring unit
Communication
detection signal
System control and

communication unit
Power Unit
Receives +12 V power from the backplane.
Provides the fan power with soft-start and overcurrent protection functions.
Fan Unit
Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

205

Transmission System
9 Auxiliary Boards
Communication Monitoring Unit
Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and ambient

temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and
communication unit.
Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width
modulation signal from the system control and communication unit.
9.2.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 9-3 shows the front panel of the FAN.
Figure 9-4 Front panel of the FAN
OptiX
OSN 550
FAN
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
Indicators
The front panel of the FAN has the following indicators: FAN, CRIT, MAJ, and MIN. For
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of
the subrack.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack

An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper
grounding of the human body.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

206

Transmission System
9 Auxiliary Boards
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.
Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves before the fan stops.
9.2.5 Valid Slots

The FAN can be inserted in slot 93 in the chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS is
the same as its physical slot.

This section describes the board specifications, including dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.
Table 9-12 lists the technical specifications of the FAN.
Table 9-12 Technical specifications of the FAN
Item
Performance
86.2 mm x 28.5 mm x 217.6 mm
Weight
0.30 kg
Power consumption
12.0 W
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

207

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
10
Power Boards
About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 550 supports the power boards PIU and APIU.
10.1
UPM
The uninterruptible power module (UPM) consists of a power box and storage batteries. It
provides access to 110 V/220 V AC mains power supplies.
10.2
PIU
The PIU is a power interface board. The OptiX OSN 550 supports two PIUs, each of which
receives one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
10.3 APIU
The APIU is an AC power interface board and supplies 100 V to 240 V AC power to the
equipment.
10.1 UPM
The uninterruptible power module (UPM) consists of a power box and storage batteries. It
provides access to 110 V/220 V AC mains power supplies.

None.
The management module of the UPM is the CAU. On the U2000, you only need to configure the CAU.

The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110
V/220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The
UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or
requires batteries.
The UPM power system consists of the GIE4805S power system (converting the 110 V/220 V
power into the 48 V power) and storage batteries. The output power of a single GIE4805S
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

208

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
power system is 340 W. The GIE4805S power system is 1U high. Figure 10-1 shows the
appearance of the GIE4805S power system. The storage batteries of the UPM work with two
GIE4805S power systems. When the external AC power system supplies power normally, the
batteries store power. When the 110 V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the batteries can
supply power for 3 to 4 hours.
Figure 10-1 Appearance of the GIE4805S power system
GIE4805S
Table 10-1 provide the functions and features of the UPM.

Table 10-1 Functions and features of the GIE4805S power system
Function
and
Feature
GIE4805S
Dual hot
backup
function
The power conversion part of the UPM adopts the hot backup design by
using two AC/DC rectifier modules. The two rectifier modules can work
simultaneously and share the load. If one rectifier module fails, the other
rectifier module immediately bears all the load. In this case, the services
running on the equipment are not affected, which improves the stability of
the system.
Hot-swappa
ble function
The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you

replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still work
normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is improved.
Storage
battery
protection
function
The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the mains
supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment automatically
switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the equipment operates
normally. If the storage battery uses the 38AH module, it can supply power
for three to four hours.
Monitoring
function
The UPM provides the monitoring module and the NM monitoring

function. The monitoring module monitors and controls the rectifier
module, AC power distribution, DC power distribution, and parameters and
status of the battery group in real time. The monitoring module also reports
the collected information to the transmission NMS in real time. The storage
battery realizes float charging and current limiting.
Loading
capacity
The loading capability of each rectifier module is 270 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

209

Transmission System
10 Power Boards

The UPM is fed by one 110 V/220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts
the input power into -48 V DC voltage to provide two DC branches and one battery branch
The UPM consists of the rectifier module and the monitoring module. Figure 10-2 shows the
block diagram of the UPM.
Figure 10-2 UPM function block diagram
110 V/220 V AC
Rectifier
module
48 V DC
PIU
Monitoring
module
System control unit
Rectifier Module
The rectifier module converts the 110 V/220 V AC mains power supply into -48 V DC voltage
required by the transmission equipment.
Monitoring Module
When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings.
The monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop.
In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is
connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains
supply fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the
monitoring module reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the
battery voltage starts to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring
module reports the DC undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery
group enables the power-off protection function to interrupt the connection between the
battery group and the equipment. As a result, the batteries are automatically protected.
When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
10.1.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the UPM has indicators and interfaces of many types.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 10-3 shows the rear view of the GIE4805S power system (subject to the UPM on site).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

210

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
Figure 10-3 Front panel of the GIE4805S

4
BAT
! CAUTION
BAT -
DO NOT INVERT POLARIT Y

BAT +
48V+
48VLOAD1
LOAD2
5
AC100~240
6
RUN
ALM Vout
ALM
ALM Vout
RS232
1. AC input
2. Rectifier module/Air outlet
3. Communication interface
4. Battery interface
5. Load
6. Load
Indicators
The front panel of the rectifier module on the left of the UPM has the following indicators:
Fault indicator (ALM) one color (red)
Output state indicator (Vout) one color (green)
The front panel of the monitoring module on the top panel of the UPM has the following
indicators:
Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) one color (red)
Power supply system status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The front panel of the GIE4805S has four interfaces. Table 10-2 describes the types and usage
of the interfaces of the GIE4805S.
Table 10-2 Interfaces of the GIE4805S power system
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
AC100240
Power
interface
It is the AC mains input socket for accessing 110 V/220

V AC power.
Red on/off
button
Button
It is on the right side of the front panel of the rectifier

module. You can enable or disable the rectifier module
by pressing the button.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

211

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
RS-232
communicatio
n interface
RS-232
The UPM communicates with the SCC through this

interface so that the UPM can report alarms to the SCC
and the SCC can control the UPM remotely.
The RS-232 serial port of power system is connected to
the NMS/COM interface of the OptiX OSN equipment
to enable the NMS to monitor the battery group and the
connected power system.
Power output
interface
Power
interface
Three power output interfaces are on the rightmost side

of the power system. The interface at the top is the
battery interface, through which the power system is
connected to the battery input socket at the back of the
storage battery box through a battery cable. The other
two interfaces are the load interfaces and can supply
power to the OptiX OSN equipment by using power
cables.
Table 10-3 provides the pin assignments of the RS-232 serial port.
Table 10-3 Pin assignments of the RS-232 serial port
Description
Pin
Status
Pin for receiving data
Receives data.
Pin for transmitting data
Transmits data.
Pin for common grounding
Grounding
There is an alarm indicating that the

rectifier module is faulty.
89
Short-circuited
The rectifier module is normal.
89
Open
There is an alarm indicating that the AC

input fails.
87
Short-circuited
The AC input is normal.
87
Open
There is an undervoltage alarm on

battery discharging.
86
Short-circuited
There is no alarm on battery

discharging.
86
Open
10.1.5 Valid Slots

The UPM is case shaped. Hence, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack. The logical
slot of the UPM on the NMS is slot 97.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

212

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
When two system control boards are configured for mutual backup, the UPM management port can be
connected to only the NMS/COM port on the system control board in slot 7.

The technical specifications of the UPM include the power parameters and mechanical
specifications.
Table 10-4 lists the technical specifications of the UPM.
Table 10-4 Technical specifications of the UPM
Item
Value
Power parameters
See Table 10-5.
Dimensi
ons (H x
W x D)
Power
box
44 mm x 438 mm x 240 mm
Storage
battery
170 mm x 197 mm x 165 mm
Weight
< 10 kg
Table 10-5 Power parameters for the GIE4805S

Parameter
Value
Voltage range of the AC input
90264 V AC
AC input
One single-phase three-wire system: 47-63 Hz
Rated input current
3.5 A
Output nominal voltage
54.00.5 V
Rated output current
8 A (two load outputs with each current not more than

5 A)
Number of backup battery

groups
One (38 Ah)
Charging current of the backup

battery
3A
Fuse of the backup battery
10 A
Storage battery: DC
undercurrent point
460.5 V
Storage battery: final voltage

point
43.50.5 V
Storage battery: floating charge

voltage
54.00.5 V
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

213

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
Parameter
Value
Regulated voltage precision
1%
Non-balance of load sharing
5% (50%100% load)
Rated efficiency of the

integrated equipment
80%
Peak-to-peak noise voltage
200 mV
DC voltage drop within the

shield (20C)
500 mV
Electrical network adjustment

rate
0.1%
10.2 PIU
The PIU is a power interface board. The OptiX OSN 550 supports two PIUs, each of which
receives one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

The functional version of the PIU is TND1.

The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and
information reporting.
Table 10-6 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.
Table 10-6 Functions and features that the PIU supports
Board
Basic functions
Power access
Two PIUs are provided and each receives one -48 V

DC or -60 V DC power input.
Maximum
power supply
capability
The maximum power supply capability of each input

is 550 W.
Maximum
current
15 A
Power output
The PIU provides other boards with -48 V power.
Protection
mode
Two power input ports form 1+1 HSB.
Power
protection
Protection
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Protection against overcurrent

214

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
Board
Surge
protection
Detection functions
Protection against short circuits
Supported
Input power detection
Surge protection status detection
Temperature detection
Detection of input overvoltage, input undervoltage,
and output overvoltage
Hot board swapping

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the PIU.

Figure 10-4 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Backplane
-48 V/-60 V
Protection and
detection unit
-48 V
EMI filtering
unit
Detection
signal
Detection signal
Communication
control unit
Board operating in distributed

power supply mode
System control and

communication unit
+3.3 V
Protection and Detection Unit

The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the
following functions:
Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.
Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm if there is any.
Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

215

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
EMI Filtering Unit

The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.
Communication Control Unit

The communication control unit controls the communication between the system control and
communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:
PIU manufacturing information
PCB version information
Surge-protection failure information
PIU temperature
10.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, power ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 10-5 Front panel of the PIU
-60V
RTN(+)
-48V
NEG(-)
PWR
Indicators
The front panel of the PIU has the following indicator: PWR. For status explanation for the
indicator, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The PIU receives one power supply. Table 10-7 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and
their respective usage.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

216

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
Table 10-7 Ports on the PIU

Port
Description
Connector Type
Required Cable
NEG1(-)
-48 V power input

port
2 mm HM power
connector, 2x2 pins
16.2 DC Power Cable
RTN1(+)
BGND power input

port
Labels
Power caution label: instructs you to read related instructions before performing any
power-related tasks.
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is being powered on. That is, turn off all
the power supplies to the PIU before removing or installing it.
10.2.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in slots 91 and 92. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS are the

This section describes the board specifications, including dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and input voltage.
Table 10-8 lists the technical specifications of the PIU.
Table 10-8 Technical specifications of the PIU
Item
Performance
41.4 mm x 21.0 mm x 229.9 mm
Weight
0.12 kg
Power consumption
0.5 W
Input voltage
-38.4 V to -72.0 V
10.3 APIU
The APIU is an AC power interface board and supplies 100 V to 240 V AC power to the
equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

217

Transmission System
10 Power Boards

The functional version of APIU boards is TNF1.

The APIU supports access of 100 V to 240 V AC power and converts it into -53.5 V DC
power.
Table 10-9 lists the functions and features that the APIU supports.
Table 10-9 Functions and features that the APIU supports
Board
Basic functions
Power access
One APIU enables access of two 100 V to 240 V AC

power inputs. One APIU supports two power
modules: AC1 and AC2. The two power modules are
separately inserted in two boxes. Both power
modules and their boxes are independently pluggable.
Supply power
200 W
Power output
The APIU provides the other boards with -53.5 V

power.
Protection
scheme
1+1 HSB
Power
protection
Protection against output overvoltage
Protection against output overcurrent
Protection against short circuits in output power
Protection against overtemperature
Protection
Surge
protection
Monitoring functions
Supported
Input power monitoring
Surge protection status monitoring
Temperature monitoring
Monitoring of input overvoltage, input undervoltage,
and output overvoltage
Hot swapping

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the APIU.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

218

Transmission System
10 Power Boards

Figure 10-6 Functional block diagram of the APIU
Backplane
100~220V
Protection and
detection unit
-53.5 V
EMI filtering
unit
Detection
signal
Detection signal
Communication
control unit
Board operating in distributed

power supply mode
System control and

communication unit
+3.3 V
Protection and Detection Unit

The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the APIU. It performs the
following functions:
Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.
Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm if there is any.
Monitors APIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit

The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.
Communication Control Unit

The communication control unit controls the communication between the system control and
communication unit and the APIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:
APIU manufacturing information
PCB version information
Surge-protection failure information
APIU temperature
10.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, power ports, and switches on the front panel.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

219

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 10-7 Front panel of the APIU
APIU
APIU
ON
ON
AC2
INPUT
OUTPUT
AC1
INPUT
OFF
OUTPUT
100-240V;50/60Hz;3.5A
OFF
100-240V;50/60Hz;3.5A
Indicators
The front panel of the APIU has the INPUT and OUTPUT indicators. For status explanation
for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The APIU enables access of two power supplies. Table 10-10 lists the types of the ports on the
APIU and their respective usage.
Table 10-10 Ports on the APIU
Port
Description
Connector Type
Required Cable
~100-240V;50
/60Hz;3.5A
Enables access of
100 V to 240 V AC
power.
Three-phase socket
16.3 AC Power Cable
Switches
The front panel of the APIU has two ON/OFF switches and they control the two AC power
ports.
10.3.5 Valid Slots

The APIU can be inserted in two slot pairs: slots 2 and 4 and slots 4 and 6. Slots 4 and 6 are
recommended.

This section describes the board specifications, including dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and input voltage.
Table 10-11 lists the technical specifications of the APIU.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

220

Transmission System
10 Power Boards
Table 10-11 Technical specifications of the APIU

Item
Performance
40.1 mm x 193.8 mm x 208.7 mm
Weight
1.93 kg
Power consumption
20.0 W
Input voltage
100 V to 240 V AC power
Output voltage
-53.5 V DC power
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

221

Transmission System
11 Outdoor Cabinet
11
Outdoor Cabinet
The equipment operating outdoors needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet.
Appearance and Structure

Figure 11-1 shows the appearance of an APM30H outdoor cabinet. Figure 11-2 shows the
structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet.
Figure 11-1 Appearance of an APM30H outdoor cabinet
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

222

Transmission System
11 Outdoor Cabinet
Figure 11-2 Structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet
1. Cable distribution
box
2. PMU
module
3. HPMI
board
5. CMUA board
6. PSU
module
7. EPS
subrack
4. Fan board (for internal

circulation)
Technical and Ambient Specifications

Table 11-1 lists the technical and ambient specifications of APM30H outdoor cabinets.
Table 11-1 Technical and ambient specifications of APM30H outdoor cabinets
Item
Specification
Remarks
700 mm x 600 mm x 480

mm
Weight
72 kg
Heat consumption
700 W
Operating temperature
-40C to +50C. The solar

radiant intensity is
112010% W/m2.
If the ambient temperature is

below -20C, a heater is
required.
NOTE
The ambient temperature in the
operating environment where a
heater is required refers to the
average of the lowest
temperature every day in the
annually coldest month in the
local place.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Altitude
-60 m to 4000 m
After the altitude reaches
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

223

Transmission System
Item
11 Outdoor Cabinet
Specification
Remarks
3000 m, the highest
operating temperature
decreases by 1C as the
altitude increases by 100 m.
Wind speed
67 m/s
Storage temperature
-40C to +70C
Dust resistance and water

resistance
In compliance with IP55

rating protection
Acoustic power
In compliance with ETS 300

753 4.1E
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

224

Transmission System
12 Filler Panel
12
Filler Panel
About This Chapter

Filler panels are used to cover vacant slots of a chassis.
12.1
Functions
A filler panel performs electromagnetic shielding for a chassis, prevents foreign objects from
entering a chassis, and ensures proper circulating of cooling air in a chassis.
12.2 Appearance and Valid Slots
This section describes the front panel of and slots valid for a filler panel. The OptiX OSN 550
supports three types of filler panels with different dimensions: filler panel for the PCX and
extended boards, filler panel for the PIU, and filler panel for the APIU.
12.1 Functions
A filler panel performs electromagnetic shielding for a chassis, prevents foreign objects from
entering a chassis, and ensures proper circulating of cooling air in a chassis.
A filler panel provides the following functions:
Performs electromagnetic shielding for a chassis.
Prevents foreign objects from entering a chassis.
Prevents the exposure of internal voltage.
Ensures proper circulating of cooling air in a chassis.
12.2 Appearance and Valid Slots

This section describes the front panel of and slots valid for a filler panel. The OptiX OSN 550
supports three types of filler panels with different dimensions: filler panel for the PCX and
extended boards, filler panel for the PIU, and filler panel for the APIU.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

225

Transmission System
12 Filler Panel
Appearance
Figure 12-1 Filler panel for the PCX and extended boards
Figure 12-2 Filler panel for the PIU
Figure 12-3 Filler panel for the APIU
Valid Slots
Table 12-1 lists the slots valid for a filler panel.
Table 12-1 Slots valid for a filler panel
Type of Filler Panel
Valid Slot
Filler panel for the PCX

and extended boards
Slots 1-8
Filler panel for the PIU
Slots 91 and 92
Filler panel for the APIU
Slots 2 and 4, slots 4 and 6
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

226

Transmission System
13
13 Optical Attenuators
Optical Attenuators
Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical
attenuators (VOAs).
Fixed Optical Attenuators

A fixed optical attenuator can reduce optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. Fixed
optical attenuators are commonly available in the following attenuation amounts: 2 dB, 5 dB,
7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB.
Figure 13-1 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator.
Figure 13-1 Appearance of a fixed optical attenuator
Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuators

A mechanical VOA can adjust optical power on an optical path within a permitted range. The
attenuation adjustment of a VOA ranges from 2 dB to 30 dB.
Figure 13-2 shows the appearance of a common VOA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

227

Transmission System
13 Optical Attenuators
Figure 13-2 Appearance of a VOA
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

228

Transmission System
14
14 Pluggable Optical Modules
Pluggable Optical Modules
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the pluggable optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. For a
board on which pluggable optical modules are installed, if applicable service categories need
to be changed or faulty optical modules need to be replaced, you need to replace only the
optical modules instead of the board.
14.1
Overview
SFP/eSFP optical modules are SFP optical transceivers and are used for SDH optical
communication and Ethernet data communication. XFP optical modules are 10-gigabit SFP
optical transceivers and are used for 10GE data communication.
14.2
SFP/eSFP Optical/Electrical Modules
This section lists the SFP/eSFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
14.3
XFP Optical Modules
This section lists the XFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
14.4
CWDM/DWDM
This topic describes the CWDM/DWDM optical modules of the OptiX OSN 550.
14.1 Overview
SFP/eSFP optical modules are SFP optical transceivers and are used for SDH optical
communication and Ethernet data communication. XFP optical modules are 10-gigabit SFP
optical transceivers and are used for 10GE data communication.
Appearance
Figure 14-1 shows the appearances of an SFP/eSFP optical module, and Figure 14-2 shows
the appearance of an XFP optical module.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

229

Transmission System
Figure 14-1 SFP/eSFP optical module
Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.5 mm x 13.4 mm x 56.5 mm

Figure 14-2 XFP optical module
Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.5 mm x 18.3 mm x 78 mm
Part Number
Part numbers identify different types of optical modules and are contained in labels. Labels
are attached to pluggable optical modules, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 14-3 shows a label for a pluggable optical module.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

230

Transmission System
Figure 14-3 Label for a pluggable optical module
You can obtain the specifications of an optical module by querying its part number in this document.
14.2 SFP/eSFP Optical/Electrical Modules

This section lists the SFP/eSFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Two-Fiber Bidirectional SFP/eSFP Optical Modules

Table 14-1 Two-fiber bidirectional SFP/eSFP optical modules
Part Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board
34060286
2.125 Gbit/s eSFP

optical module
Optical transceiver,
eSFP, 850 nm, 2.125
Gbit/s (multirate),
-9.5 dBm, -2.5 dBm,
-17 dBm, LC, MM,
0.5 km
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX
GA/PCXGB/EG4C/
EGT1
34060473
1.25 Gbit/s eSFP

optical module
eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3
dBm, -20 dBm, LC,
SM, 10 km
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX
GA/PCXGB/EG4C/
EGT1
34060298
eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -23 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX
GA/PCXGB/EG4C/
EGT1
34060360
eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 5
dBm, -23 dBm, LC,
SM, 80 km
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX
GA/PCXGB/EG4C/
EGT1
34060290
eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -9.5 dBm, -3
dBm, -20 dBm, LC
(-40 to +85), SM, 10
km
EM6F/PCXGA/PC
XGB/EG4C
34060333
eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

231

Transmission System
Part Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board
Gbit/s, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -22 dBm, LC
(-40 to +85), SM, 40
km
34060324
34060287
eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 5
dBm, -24 dBm, LC
(-40 to +85), SM, 80
km
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-1, -15 dBm, -8
dBm, -31 dBm, LC,
MM, 2 km
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C
34060276
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-1, -15 dBm, -8
dBm, -31 dBm, LC,
SM, 15 km
EM6F/PCXLX/PCX
LG/EF8F/EG4C/SL
1D/SL1Q/CXL/CQ1
34060281
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-1, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -37 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
EM6F/PCXLX/PCX
LG/EF8F/EG4C/SL
1D/SL1Q/CXL/CQ1
34060282
eSFP, 1550 nm,
STM-1, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -37 dBm, LC,
SM, 80 km
EM6F/PCXLX/PCX
LG/EF8F/EG4C/SL
1D/SL1Q/CXL/CQ1
34060307
eSFP (industry),
1310 nm, STM-1,
-15 dBm, -8 dBm,
-31 dBm, LC, SM,
15 km
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
CQ1
34060308
eSFP (industry),
1310 nm, STM-1, -5
dBm, 0 dBm, -37
dBm, LC, SM, 40
km
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
CQ1
34060309
eSFP (industry),
1550 nm, STM-1, -5
dBm, 0 dBm, -37
dBm, LC, SM, 80
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
CQ1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
155 Mbit/s eSFP

optical module

232

Transmission System
Part Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board
km
34060277
622 Mbit/s eSFP

optical module
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-4, -15 dBm, -8
dBm, -30 dBm, LC,
SM, 15 km
34060280
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-4, -3 dBm, 2
dBm, -30 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
34060284
eSFP, 1550 nm,
STM-4, -3 dBm, 2
dBm, -30 dBm, LC,
SM, 80 km
34060485
2.5 Gbit/s eSFP

optical module
PCXLX/PCXLG/C
XL/SL4D
eSFP, 1310 nm, 155
Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -21 dBm, LC,
SM, 15 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/C
XL
34060289
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-16, -2 dBm, 3
dBm, -29 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/C
XL
34060488
eSFP, 1550 nm,
STM-16, -2 dBm, 3
dBm, -30 dBm, LC,
SM, 80 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/C
XL
Single-Fiber Bidirectional SFP/eSFP Optical Modules

Table 14-2 Single-fiber bidirectional SFP/eSFP optical modules
Part Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board
34060470
1.25 Gbit/s
single-fiber
bidirectional eSFP
optical module
eSFP, Tx 1310
nm/Rx 1490 nm,
1.25 Gbit/s, -9 dBm,
-3 dBm, -19.5 dBm,
LC, SM, 10 km
This module can

function as a GE
optical port or an
STM-4 optical port.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

This module can
233

Transmission System
Part Number
Name
34060475
Specifications
Applicable Board
eSFP, Tx 1490
nm/Rx 1310 nm,
-3 dBm, -19.5 dBm,
LC, SM, 10 km
function as a GE
optical port when
installed on the
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX
GA/PCXGB/EGT1/
EG4C board.
This module can
function as an
STM-4 optical port
when installed on
the
PCXLG/PCXLX/C
XL/SL4D board.
34060539
eSFP, 1310 nm
(Tx)/1490 nm (Rx),
3 dBm, -23 dBm,
LC, SM, 40 km
34060540
34060363
34060364
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
eSFP, 1490 nm
(Tx)/1310 nm (Rx),
3 dBm, -23 dBm,
LC, SM, 40 km
155 Mbit/s eSFP

optical module
eSFP, Tx 1310
nm/Rx 1550 nm,
STM-1, -15 dBm, -8
dBm, -32 dBm,
LC/PC, SM, 15 km
eSFP, Tx 1550
nm/Rx 1310 nm,
STM-1, -15 dBm, -8
dBm, -32 dBm,
LC/PC, SM, 15 km

This module can

function as a GE
optical port or an
STM-4 optical port.
This module can
function as a GE
optical port when
installed on the
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX
GA/PCXGB/EGT1/
EG4C board.
This module can
function as an
STM-4 optical port
when installed on
the
PCXLG/PCXLX/C
XL/SL4D board.
This module can
function as an FE
optical port or an
STM-1 optical port.
This module can
function as an FE
optical port when
installed on the
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C
board.
This module can
function as an
STM-1 optical port
when installed on
the
PCXLG/PCXLX/C
XL/SL1D/SL1Q/CQ
1 board.
234

Transmission System
Part Number
Name
34060328
34060329
Specifications
Applicable Board
eSFP, Tx 1310
nm/Rx 1550 nm,
STM-1, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -32 dBm,
LC/PC, SM, 40 km
This module can

function as an FE
optical port or an
STM-1 optical port.
eSFP, Tx 1550
nm/Rx 1310 nm,
STM-1, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -32 dBm,
LC/PC, SM, 40 km
This module can

function as an FE
optical port when
installed on the
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C
board.
This module can
function as an
STM-1 optical port
when installed on
the
PCXLG/PCXLX/C
XL/SL1D/SL1Q/CQ
1 board.
Optical module specifications are explained as follows: name, encapsulation form, operating
wavelength, rate, minimum output optical power, maximum output optical power, receiver
sensitivity, optical port type, optical fiber type, and transmission distance.
Optical module specifications may be updated in various product versions. Contact local Huawei
offices for the latest optical module specifications.
14.3 XFP Optical Modules

This section lists the XFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
XFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 Supports

Table 14-3 XFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 Supports
Part Number
Name
Specification
Applicable Board
34060362
9.95 Gbit/s to 10.71

Gbit/s XFP optical
module
XFP, 850 nm, 10.3
Gbit/s, -7.3 dBm,
-1.3 dBm, -7.5 dBm,
LC, MM, 0.3 km
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
34060313
9.95 Gbit/s to 10.71

Gbit/s XFP optical
module
XFP, 1310 nm, 9.95
Gbit/s to 10.71
Gbit/s, -6 dBm, -1
dBm, -14.4 dBm,
LC, SM, 10 km
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

235

Transmission System
Part Number
Name
Specification
Applicable Board
34060322
9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1

Gbit/s XFP optical
module
XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95
Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s,
-1 dBm, 2 dBm, -15
dBm, LC, SM, 40
km
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
34060361
9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1

Gbit/s XFP optical
module
XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95
Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s,
0 dBm, 4 dBm, -24
dBm, LC, SM, 80
km
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
34060577
9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1

Gbit/s XFP optical
module
XFP(industry), 1550
nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s, +2
dBm, -1 dBm, -15
dBm, LC,
single-mode, 40 km,
-40 to 85 C
PCXX/EX1
Optical module specifications are explained as follows in sequence: name, encapsulation form,
operating wavelength, rate, minimum output optical power, maximum output optical power, receiver
sensitivity, optical interface type, optical fiber type, and transmission distance.
offices for latest optical module specifications.
14.4 CWDM/DWDM
This topic describes the CWDM/DWDM optical modules of the OptiX OSN 550.
CWDM Optical Module

Table 14-4 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/GE CWDM eSFP optical modules.
Table 14-4 STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/GE CWDM eSFP optical modules
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board
34060416
125 Mbit/s to
2.67 Gbit/s
CWDM eSFP
optical
module
Optical transceiver, eSFP,

1471 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 19
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/PCXGA/P
CXGB/CXL/EM6F/EG4C
34060417
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

236

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board
1491 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67

dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060418

1511 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060419

1531 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060420

1551 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060421

1571 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060422

1591 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060423

1611 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060483
34060481
100 Mbit/s to
2.67 Gbit/s
CWDM eSFP
optical
module

1471 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
1491 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
34060479

1511 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
34060482

1531 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
34060478
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

237

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board
1551 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67

dBm, LC, 80 km
34060476

1571 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
34060477

1591 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
34060480

1611 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
Table 14-5 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of 10 Gbit/s
CWDM XFP optical modules.
Table 14-5 10 Gbit/s CWDM XFP optical modules
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board
34060547
9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s
CWDM XFP
optical
module
Optical transceiver, XFP,

1471 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm,
23 dBm, LC, SM, 70 km
PCXX/PCXLX/EX1
34060548

1491 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060549

1511 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060550

1531 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060551

1551 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

238

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
34060552

1571 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060553

1591 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060554

1611 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
Applicable Board
DWDM Optical Module

Table 14-6 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of STM-16
DWDM eSFP optical modules.
Table 14-6 STM-16 DWDM eSFP optical modules
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board
34060366
125 Mbit/s to
2.67 Gbit/s
DWDM eSFP
optical
module

1560.61 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/CXL
34060372

1559.79 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060373

1558.98 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060374

1558.17 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060375

1557.36 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060376

1556.55 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

239

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board

28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060377

1555.75 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060378

1554.94 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060379

1554.13 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060380

1553.33 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060381

1552.52 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060382

1551.72 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060383

1550.92 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060384

1550.12 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060385

1549.32 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060386

1548.51 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060387

1547.72 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

240

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board

28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060388

1546.92 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060389

1546.12 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060390

1545.32 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060391

1544.53 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060392

1543.73 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060393

1542.94 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060394

1542.14 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060395

1541.35 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060396

1540.56 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060397

1539.77 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060398

1538.98 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

241

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board

28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060399

1538.19 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060400

1537.40 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060401

1536.61 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060402

1535.82 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060403

1535.04 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060404

1534.25 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060405

1533.47 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060406

1532.68 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060407

1531.90 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060408

1531.12 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060409

1530.33 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

242

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board

28 dBm, LC, 120 km
34060410

1529.55 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
28 dBm, LC, 120 km
Table 14-7 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of 10 Gbit/s
DWDM XFP optical modules.
Table 14-7 10 Gbit/s DWDM XFP optical modules
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board
03030LRD
10.71 Gbit/s
DWDM XFP
optical
module
Optical transceiver, 19 dBm

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
ps/nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm,
192.10 THz, LC/PC
PCXX/PCXLX/EX1
03030LRF

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
192.20 THz, LC/PC
03030LRG

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
192.30 THz, LC/PC
03030LRH

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
192.40 THz, LC/PC
03030LRJ

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
192.50 THz, LC/PC
03030LRK

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
192.60 THz, LC/PC
03030LRL

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
192.70 THz, LC/PC
03030LRM

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

243

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board

192.80 THz, LC/PC
03030LRN

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
192.90 THz, LC/PC
03030LRP

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
193.00 THz, LC/PC
03030LRQ

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
193.10 THz, LC/PC
03030LRR

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
193.20 THz, LC/PC
03030LRS

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
193.30 THz, LC/PC
03030LRT

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
193.40 THz, LC/PC
03030LRU

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
193.50 THz, LC/PC
03030LRV

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
193.60 THz, LC/PC
03030LRW

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
193.70 THz, LC/PC
03030LRX

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
193.80 THz, LC/PC
03030LRY

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

244

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board

193.90 THz, LC/PC
03030LSA

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
194.00 THz, LC/PC
03030LSB

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
194.10 THz, LC/PC
03030LSC

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
194.20 THz, LC/PC
03030LSD

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
194.30 THz, LC/PC
03030LSE

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
194.40 THz, LC/PC
03030LSF

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
194.50 THz, LC/PC
03030LSG

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
194.60 THz, LC/PC
03030LSH

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
194.70 THz, LC/PC
03030LSJ

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
194.80 THz, LC/PC
03030LSK

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
194.90 THz, LC/PC
03030LSL

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

245

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board

195.00 THz, LC/PC
03030LSM

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
195.10 THz, LC/PC
03030LSN

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
195.20 THz, LC/PC
03030LSP

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
195.30 THz, LC/PC
03030LSQ

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
195.40THz, LC/PC
03030LSR

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
195.50 THz, LC/PC
03030LSS

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
195.60 THz, LC/PC
03030LST

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
195.70 THz, LC/PC
03030LSU

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
195.80 THz, LC/PC
03030LSV

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
195.90 THz, LC/PC
03030LSW

to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800
196.00 THz, LC/PC
34060501
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s

1550.92 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to

246

Transmission System
Part
Number
34060502
Name
Specifications
DWDM XFP
optical
module

1550.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060503

1531.90 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060504

1531.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060514

1549.32 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060515

1530.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060531

1548.51 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060532

1529.55 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060533

1551.72 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060534

1532.68 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060623

1554.13 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060624

1553.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Applicable Board

247

Transmission System
Part
Number
Name
Specifications
Applicable Board

34060625

1552.52 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060626

1535.04 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060627

1534.25 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
34060628

1533.47 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Optical module specifications are explained as follows in sequence: name, encapsulation form,
operating wavelength, rate, minimum output optical power, maximum output optical power, receiver
sensitivity, optical interface type, optical fiber type, and transmission distance.
offices for latest optical module specifications.

248

Transmission System
15
15 Pluggable electrical Modules
Pluggable electrical Modules
This chapter describes the pluggable electrical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. For
a board on which pluggable electrical modules are installed, if applicable service categories
need to be changed or faulty electrical modules need to be replaced, you need to replace only
the electrical modules instead of the board.
Appearance
Figure 15-1 GE SFP electrical module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

249

Transmission System
15 Pluggable electrical Modules
Figure 15-2 STM-1 SFP electrical module
SFP Electrical Modules

Table 15-1 SFP electrical modules
Part Number
Name
Specification
Applicable Board
34100052
1000BASE-T RJ45
SFP electrical
module
1000BASE-T
(RJ45) SFP
electrical module,
auto-negotiation,
100 m
EM6F/EGT1
34100104
STM-1 SFP
electrical module
Electrical active
module-copper
transceiver, SFP,
STM-1e
SL1D/SL1Q/CXL/C
Q1
Optical/Electrical module specifications may be updated in various product versions. Contact local
Huawei offices for the latest optical module specifications.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

250

Transmission System
16 Cables
16
Cables
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the cables used on the equipment.
16.1
Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper has one connector at each end.

16.2
DC Power Cable
A DC power cable connects the PIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for access
of power to the chassis.
16.3 AC Power Cable
An AC power cable connects the APIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for
access of AC power to the chassis.
16.4
UPM Power Cable
This section describes the structure, pin assignments, and technical specifications of UPM
power cables.
16.5
PGND Cable
A PGND cable connects the grounding point of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis to the grounding
point of external equipment so that the chassis and external equipment share the same ground.
16.6
STM-1 Cable
An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
16.7
16xE1/T1 Cable
An 16xE1/T1 cable uses Anea 96 connectors and can transmit a maximum of 16 E1/T1
signals.
16.8
21xE1/T1 Cable
signals.
16.9
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
E3/T3 Cable
251

Transmission System
16 Cables
An E3/T3 cable receives/transmits E3/T3 signals. One end of the E3/T3 cable has an SMB
connector that is connected to an E3/T3 electrical interface board. The other end of the E3/T3
cable is connected to a DDF and its connector needs to be prepared on site as required.
16.10 Network Cable
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable
are terminated with an RJ45 connector.
16.1 Fiber Jumper

A fiber jumper has one connector at each end.
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX OSN 550. The
connector at the other end of the fiber jumper varies depending on the type of the
interconnected optical port.
Types of Fiber Jumpers

Table 16-1 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1
Connector 2
Cable
LC/PC
FC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC
LC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show two common types of fiber connectors: LC/PC connector and
FC/PC connector.
Figure 16-2 LC/PC connector
LC/PC
connector
Protective cap
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

252

Transmission System
16 Cables
Figure 16-3 FC/PC connector

Protective cap
FC/PC connector
16.2 DC Power Cable

A DC power cable connects the PIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for access
of power to the chassis.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-4 DC power cable
Table 16-2 Power cable specifications
Model
Cable
Terminal
4 mm2 power
cable and
terminal
Power cable, 450

V/750 V, H07Z-K, 4
mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero halogen
Bare crimping terminal, single cord end

terminal, 4 mm2, 20 A, insertion depth of 10
mm, grey
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

253

Transmission System
Model
Cable
16 Cables
Terminal
cable
For the OptiX OSN 550, power cables with a 4 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum
distance of 40 meters.
16.3 AC Power Cable

An AC power cable connects the APIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for
access of AC power to the chassis.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-5 AC power cable
Specifications of an AC power cable connector used on the OptiX OSN 550: C13, straight,
female
16.4 UPM Power Cable

This section describes the structure, pin assignments, and technical specifications of UPM
power cables.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

254

Transmission System
16 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-6 UPM power cable
Label 2
Main label
X2
W1
Label 1
W2
1
2
X1
X3
Pin Assignments
Table 16-3 Pin assignments of UPM power cables
Cable
Connectors
X2 and X3
Correspondi
ng Cable
Cable Connector
X1
Core Color
X2
W1
Blue (-48 V/-60 V power)
X3
W2
Black (power ground)
Table 16-4 Technical specifications of UPM power cables
Item
Description
Cable connector
X1
Bare crimp terminal, single core end terminal, 2.5 mm2
Cable connector
X2
Common connector, 2-pin, single row
Cab
le
Power cable, 600 V, UL1015, 16 AWG, blue
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Model
Power cable, 600 V, UL1015, 16 AWG, black

Number
of cores
Fireproof
class
VW-1
Color
Blue and black
Length
1.8 meters

255

Transmission System
16 Cables
16.5 PGND Cable

A PGND cable connects the grounding point of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis to the grounding
point of external equipment so that the chassis and external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-7 PGND cable
Main label
1
Cable tie
H.S.tube
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT
2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
16.6 STM-1 Cable

An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-8 STM-1 cable
1. Coaxial connector, SAA

straight/male
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
2. Main label

3. Coaxial cable
256

Transmission System
16 Cables
Pin Assignments
None.
Item
Description
Connector
Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm

straight/male
Cable model
Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Number of cores
One
Core diameter
Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal

insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor
(0.34 mm)
Length
10 m
Fireproof class
CM
16.7 16xE1/T1 Cable

signals.
There are two types of 16xE1/T1 cables: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair
cables.
A 75-ohm E1 cable and a 120-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.
The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1/T1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening
of 2.5 mm or 1.7 mm to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1/T1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1
coaxial connector.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

257

Transmission System
16 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-9 75-ohm/120-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable
Main label
1
W
X1
Pos.96
ViewA
Cable connector, Anea,

96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
Pin Assignments
16xTable 16-5 provides details about the pin assignments for a 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable.
Table 16-5 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Tip
R0
13
Tip
13
R6
49
Tip
25
R12
Ring
14
Ring
50
Ring
25
Tip
37
Tip
73
Tip
26
T12
26
Ring
38
Ring
74
Ring
Tip
15
Tip
51
Tip
27
R13
Ring
16
Ring
52
Ring
27
Tip
39
Tip
75
Tip
28
T13
28
Ring
40
Ring
76
Ring
Tip
17
Tip
53
Tip
29
R14
Ring
18
Ring
54
Ring
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
T0
R1
T1
R2
14
15
16
17
T6
R7
T7
R8

258

Transmission System
16 Cables
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
29
Tip
T2
41
Tip
18
T8
77
Tip
30
T14
30
Ring
42
Ring
78
Ring
Tip
19
Tip
55
Tip
31
R15
Ring
20
Ring
56
Ring
31
Tip
43
Tip
79
Tip
32
T15
32
Ring
44
Ring
80
Ring
Tip
21
Tip
10
Ring
22
Ring
33
Tip
45
Tip
34
Ring
46
Ring
11
Tip
23
Tip
12
Ring
24
Ring
35
Tip
47
Tip
36
Ring
48
Ring
R3
T3
R4
10
T4
11
R5
12
T5
19
R9
20
T9
21
R10
22
T10
23
R11
24
T11
Table 16-6 provides details about the pin assignments for a 120-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable.
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lati
on
shi
p
Blu
e
Wh
ite
R0
Pai
r
15
Wh
ite
R7
Pai
r
Gre
en
53
Wh
ite
R1
4
Pai
r
Blu
e
Or
ang
e
16
Blu
e
54
Blu
e
25
Wh
ite
39
Wh
ite
77
Wh
ite
T1
4
Pai
r
26
Or
ang
e
40
Or
ang
e
78
Or
ang
e
Wh
17
Wh
55
Wh
R1
Pai
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
T0
R1
Pai
r
Pai
T7
R8
Pai
r
Pai

259

Transmission System
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
ite
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Gr
een
27
Wh
ite
28
Br
ow
n
Wh
ite
Gr
ay
29
Re
d
30
Blu
e
Re
d
Or
ang
e
31
Re
d
32
Gr
een
Re
d
10
Br
ow
n
33
Re
d
34
Gr
ay
11
Bla
ck
16 Cables
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
R4
T4
R5
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
ite
18
Gr
een
41
Wh
ite
42
Br
ow
n
19
Wh
ite
20
Gr
ay
43
Re
d
44
Blu
e
21
Re
d
22
Or
ang
e
45
Re
d
46
Gr
een
23
Re
d
24
Br
ow
n
47
Re
d
48
Gr
ay
49
Bla
ck
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
T8
Pai
r
R9
Pai
r
T9
Pai
r
R1
0
Pai
r
T1
0
Pai
r
R1
1
Pai
r
T1
1
Pai
r
R1
2
Pai
r

Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lati
on
shi
p
ite
T1
5
Pai
r
56
Gr
een
79
Wh
ite
80
Br
ow
n
260

Transmission System
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
12
Blu
e
35
Bla
ck
36
Or
ang
e
13
Bla
ck
14
Gr
een
37
Bla
ck
38
Br
ow
n
La
bel
T5
R6
T6
16 Cables
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
50
Blu
e
73
Bla
ck
74
Or
ang
e
51
Bla
ck
52
Gr
een
75
Bla
ck
76
Br
ow
n
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
T1
2
Pai
r
R1
3
Pai
r
T1
3
Pai
r
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lati
on
shi
p
Table 16-7 lists the technical specifications for 16xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 16-7 Technical specifications for 16xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN 550
Item
Description
Connector type
Anea 96
Number of cores
32 cores/pair
Fireproof class
IEC60332-3C
16.8 21xE1/T1 Cable

signals.
There are two types of 21xE1/T1 cables: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair
cables.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

261

Transmission System
16 Cables
A 75-ohm E1 cable and a 120-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.

The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1/T1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening
of 2.5 mm or 1.7 mm to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1/T1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1
coaxial connector.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-10 75-ohm/120-ohm 21xE1/T1 cable
Main label
1
W
X1
Pos.96
ViewA
Cable connector, Anea,

96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
Pin Assignments
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Tip
R0
15
Tip
15
R7
53
Tip
29
R14
Ring
16
Ring
54
Ring
25
Tip
39
Tip
77
Tip
30
T14
26
Ring
40
Ring
78
Ring
Tip
17
Tip
55
Tip
31
R15
Ring
18
Ring
56
Ring
27
Tip
41
Tip
79
Tip
32
T15
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
T0
R1
T1
16
17
18
T7
R8
T8

262

Transmission System
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
28
Ring
Tip
Ring
29
Tip
30
Ring
Tip
Ring
31
Tip
32
Ring
Tip
10
Ring
33
Tip
34
Ring
11
Tip
12
Ring
35
Tip
36
Ring
13
Tip
14
Ring
37
Tip
38
Ring
16 Cables
Lab
el
R2
T2
R3
T3
R4
10
T4
11
R5
12
T5
13
R6
14
T6
Pin
Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
42
Ring
19
Tip
20
Ring
43
Tip
44
Ring
21
Tip
22
Ring
45
Tip
46
Ring
23
Tip
24
Ring
47
Tip
48
Ring
49
Tip
50
Ring
73
Tip
74
Ring
51
Tip
52
Ring
75
Tip
76
Ring
19
Lab
el
R9
20
T9
21
R10
22
T10
23
R11
24
T11
25
R12
26
T12
27
R13
28
T13
Pin
Cor
e
80
Ring
57
Tip
58
Ring
81
Tip
82
Ring
59
Tip
60
Ring
83
Tip
84
Ring
61
Tip
62
Ring
85
Tip
86
Ring
63
Tip
64
Ring
87
Tip
88
Ring
65
Tip
66
Ring
89
Tip
90
Ring
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
33
R16
34
T16
35
R17
36
T17
37
R18
38
T18
39
R19
40
T19
41
R20
42
T20
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Blu
Wh
R0
Pai
Or
15
Wh
R7
Pai
Gre
53
Wh
R1
Pai
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

263

Transmission System
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
ite
2
Blu
e
25
Wh
ite
26
Or
ang
e
Wh
ite
Gr
een
27
Wh
ite
28
Br
ow
n
Wh
ite
Gr
ay
29
Re
d
30
Blu
e
Re
d
Or
ang
e
31
Re
d
32
Gr
een
Re
d
T0
R1
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
R4
16 Cables
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
ang
e
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
ite
16
Blu
e
39
Wh
ite
40
Or
ang
e
17
Wh
ite
18
Gr
een
41
Wh
ite
42
Br
ow
n
19
Wh
ite
20
Gr
ay
43
Re
d
44
Blu
e
21
Re
d
22
Or
ang
e
45
Re
d
46
Gr
een
23
Re
d
T7
R8
T8
R9
T9
R1
0
T1
0
R1
1
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
en
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r

Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
ite
T1
4
Pai
r
R1
5
Pai
r
T1
5
Pai
r
R1
6
Pai
r
T1
6
Pai
r
R1
7
Pai
r
T1
7
Pai
r
R1
8
Pai
r
54
Blu
e
77
Wh
ite
78
Or
ang
e
55
Wh
ite
56
Gr
een
79
Wh
ite
80
Br
ow
n
57
Wh
ite
58
Gr
ay
81
Re
d
82
Blu
e
59
Re
d
60
Or
ang
e
83
Re
d
84
Gr
een
61
Re
d
264

Transmission System
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
10
Br
ow
n
33
Re
d
34
Gr
ay
11
Bla
ck
12
Blu
e
35
Bla
ck
36
Or
ang
e
13
Bla
ck
14
Gr
een
37
Bla
ck
38
Br
ow
n
La
bel
T4
R5
T5
R6
T6
16 Cables
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
24
Br
ow
n
47
Re
d
48
Gr
ay
49
Bla
ck
50
Blu
e
73
Bla
ck
74
Or
ang
e
51
Bla
ck
52
Gr
een
75
Bla
ck
76
Br
ow
n
La
bel
T1
1
R1
2
T1
2
R1
3
T1
3
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Pai
r
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
62
Br
ow
n
85
Re
d
86
Gr
ay
63
Bla
ck
64
Blu
e
87
Bla
ck
88
Or
ang
e
65
Bla
ck
66
Gr
een
89
Bla
ck
90
Br
ow
n
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
T1
8
Pai
r
R1
9
Pai
r
T1
9
Pai
r
R2
0
Pai
r
T2
0
Pai
r
Table 16-10 lists the technical specifications for 21xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN
550.
Table 16-10 Technical specifications for 21xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN 550
Item
Description
Connector type
Anea 96
Number of cores
42 cores/pair
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

265

Transmission System
16 Cables
Item
Description
Fireproof class
IEC60332-3C
16.9 E3/T3 Cable

An E3/T3 cable receives/transmits E3/T3 signals. One end of the E3/T3 cable has an SMB
connector that is connected to an E3/T3 electrical interface board. The other end of the E3/T3
cable is connected to a DDF and its connector needs to be prepared on site as required.
Structure
Figure 16-11 Structure of an E3/T3 cable
1. Coaxial connector - SMB
2. Main label
3. Coaxial cable
Pin Assignments
None.
Item
Description
Connector
Coaxial connector, SMB connector, 75 ohms, straight, female
Cable I
Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal insulation
layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34 mm)
Available lengths: 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m
Cable II
Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 4.4 mm, 2.4 mm, 0.4 mm, shielded, gray
Available lengths: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m
Cable III
Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 6.7 mm, 3.8 mm, 0.61 mm, shielded, gray
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

266

Transmission System
Item
16 Cables
Description
Available lengths: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 130 m
Cable IV
Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 5.80 mm, 3.71 mm, 0.643 mm, black
Available length: 30 m
Fireproof
class
CM
16.10 Network Cable

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable
are terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Interfaces Using RJ45 Connectors

The following types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors:
Medium dependent interfaces (MDIs): used by terminal equipment, for example,

network card
MDI-Xs: used by network equipment
The difference between MDIs and MDI-Xs is with regard to pin assignments. Table 16-11
provides details about the pin assignments for ports in MDI mode. Table 16-12 provides
details about the pin assignments for ports in MDI-X mode.
Different cables are used between the interfaces using RJ45 connectors.
A straight-through cable is used between an MDI and an MDI-X.
A crossover cable is used between two MDIs.
A crossover cable is used between two MDI-Xs.

The NMS/COM port and Ethernet electrical service ports of the equipment support the
auto-MDI/MDI-X mode. Therefore, straight-through cables and crossover cables can be used to connect
the NMS/COM port and Ethernet electrical service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.

Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
TX-
BIDA-
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

267

Transmission System
Pin
16 Cables
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Signal
Function
Function
(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)

Pin
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

268

Transmission System
16 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-12 Straight-through cable
1. Network port
connector, RJ45
2. Label 1
3. Main label
4. Label 2
Figure 16-13 Crossover cable
1. Network port connector,

RJ45
2. Label
1
3. Main
label
4. Network
cable
5. Label
2
Pin Assignments
Table 16-13 Pin assignments for a straight-through cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.1
X2.1
White/Orange
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White/Green
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Twisted pair
Twisted pair
269

Transmission System
16 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
Twisted pair
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Table 16-14 Pin assignments for a crossover cable

Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.6
X2.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X1.3
X2.1
White/Orange
X1.1
X2.3
White/Green
X1.2
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network port connector, RJ45 connector, 8-pin, 8-bit, shielded,

connector, 24 to 26 AWG, CAT 6/configured with the SFTP network
cable
Cable type
Straight-through cable: communication cable, 10015 ohms,

CAT5E SFTP 24 AWG, 8 cores, PANTONE 445U
Crossover cable: communication cable, 1005 ohms, CAT5E

SFTP 24 AWG, 8 cores, PANTONE 646U
Number of cores
8 cores
Fireproof class
CM
Length
Straight-through cable: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
Crossover cable: 5 m, 30 m
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

270

Transmission System
17 Parameter Settings
17
Parameter Settings
To use the functions of a board, first set parameters related to the board. This section provides
hyperlinks of board parameter settings.
Table 17-1 lists references for parameter settings on boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Table 17-1 References for parameter settings on boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Board Type
Board Involved
Parameter Setting Reference
System control,
switching, and
timing board
PCX, CXL
Parameters for Configuring system control,

switching, and timing board
Packet
processing board
EM6T, EM6F, EF8F,

EG4C, EX1
Parameters for Configuring Ethernet Ports
MD1
Parameters for Configuring CES Ports
CQ1
Parameters for Configuring Channelized

STM-1 Ports
SDH boards
SL1D, SL4D, SL1Q
Parameters for Configuring SDH Boards
PDH boards
SP3D, PL3T
Parameters for Configuring PDH Boards
EoS boards
EFS8, EGT1
Parameters for Configuring VC-12 Path

Overheads
Parameters for Configuring Ethernet Ports
Parameters for Configuring Broadcast

Data Interfaces
Parameters for Configuring F1 Data

Service
Auxiliary board
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
AUX

271

Transmission System
A Glossary
Glossary
Numerics
2DM
two-way delay measurement
3G
See 3rd Generation.
3R
reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G)
The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the

International Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is
expected to deliver data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s,
compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation
technology.
802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ)
A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged
frame. The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with
a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted
over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag.
This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent
transmission of packets over private VLANs.
A
AAL
See ATM Adaptation Layer.
ABR
See available bit rate.
AC
alternating current
ACH
associated channel header
ACL
See access control list.
ACR
allowed cell rate
ADM
add/drop multiplexer
ADMC
automatically detected and manually cleared
ADSL
asymmetric digital subscriber line
AF
See assured forwarding.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

272

Transmission System
A Glossary
AGC
automatic gain control
AIS
alarm indication signal
ALC
See automatic level control.
ALS
See automatic laser shutdown.
AM
See adaptive modulation.
AMI
See alternate mark inversion.
AMU
ATM cell multiplex unit
ANSI
See American National Standards Institute.
APD
See avalanche photodiode.
APS
automatic protection switching
ARP
See Address Resolution Protocol.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASK
amplitude shift keying
ATM
asynchronous transfer mode
ATM Adaptation Layer

(AAL)
An interface between higher-layer protocols and Asynchronous Transfer Mode

(ATM). The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various
types of information, including voice, video, and data.
ATPC
See automatic transmit power control.
AU
See administrative unit.
AUG
See administrative unit group.
AWG
arrayed waveguide grating
Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP)
An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts

and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP
responses.
American National
Standards Institute
(ANSI)
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing

industry. ANSI participates in defining network protocol standards.
access control list (ACL)
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have
access to a resource.
adaptive modulation (AM)
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode

according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the
equipment uses a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission
efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality
is degraded, the equipment uses the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve
the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services.
administrative unit (AU)
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order
path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload
(the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the
payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

273

Transmission System
A Glossary
administrative unit group

(AUG)
One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM

payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s.
alternate mark inversion

(AMI)
A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent

logical 1 values.
assured forwarding (AF)
One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of
IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth
and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in
forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service
class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.
automatic laser shutdown

(ALS)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser

transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control

(ALC)
A feature that identifies speech signals and adjusts the sound volume to stay
within a comfortable range, improving user experience.
automatic transmit power

control (ATPC)
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal
detected at the receiver
available bit rate (ABR)
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides
possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require
the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or
delay.
avalanche photodiode
(APD)
A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.

Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free
an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher
voltages than other semiconductor electronics.
B
B-ISDN
See broadband integrated services digital network.
BA
booster amplifier
BBE
background block error
BC
boundary clock
BCD
binary coded decimal
BDI
See backward defect indication.
BE
See best effort.
BER
bit error rate
BFD
See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP
Border Gateway Protocol
BIOS
See basic input/output system.
BIP
See bit interleaved parity.
BIP-8
See bit interleaved parity-8.
BIP-X
bit interleaved parity-X
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

274

Transmission System
A Glossary
BITS
See building integrated timing supply.
BMC
best master clock
BNC
See bayonet-neill-concelman.
BPDU
See bridge protocol data unit.
BPS
board protection switching
BRAS
See broadband remote access server.
BSC
binary synchronous communication
BSS
base station subsystem
BTS
base transceiver station
BWS
backbone wavelength division multiplexing system
Bidirectional Forwarding
Detection (BFD)
A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established
between neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to
each other. If one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated
period, the system regards that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper
layer protocol to take actions to recover the faulty link.
backplane
An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional
electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backward defect
indication (BDI)
A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform
the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
basic input/output system

(BIOS)
A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output

control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system
setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions
for the computer.
bayonet-neill-concelman
(BNC)
A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
best effort (BE)
A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are

forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the
bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram
can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any
improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability.
bit interleaved parity

(BIP)
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by

equipment at the transmit end over a specified portion of the signal in such a
manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all
X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides
even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified
portion, and so on. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that
there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A
monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion
includes the BIP-X.
bit interleaved parity-8

(BIP-8)
Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a

transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits
(one byte) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

275

Transmission System
A Glossary
number of "1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for
the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bridge protocol data unit
(BPDU)
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended
LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain
information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends
up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to
detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting
down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup,
or blocked, state.
broadband integrated
services digital network
(B-ISDN)
A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as

voice. It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over
SONNET-based circuits at 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadband remote access

server (BRAS)
A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between

backbone networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods
for fundamental access and manages the broadband access network. It is
deployed at the edge of network to provide broadband access services,
convergence, and forwarding of multiple services, meeting the demands for
transmission capacity and bandwidth utilization of different users. BRAS is a
core device for the broadband users' access to a broadband network.
building integrated timing

supply (BITS)
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one

can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to
connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory
synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called
BITS.
built-in WDM
A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that
belong to the OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several
wavelengths directly.
C
CAR
committed access rate
CAS
See channel associated signaling.
CAS multiframe
A multiframe set up based on timeslot 16. Each CAS multiframe contains 16 E1

PCM frames. Among the 8 bits of timeslot 16 in the first frame, the first 4 bits
are used for multiframe synchronization. The multiframe alignment signal
(MFAS) for synchronization is 0000. The last 4 bits are used as the not
multiframe alignment signal (NMFAS). The NMFAS is XYXX. For the other 15
frames, timeslot 16 is used to transmit exchange and multiplexing (E&M)
signaling corresponding to each timeslot.
CAU
See client automatic upgrade.
CBR
See constant bit rate.
CBS
See committed burst size.
CC
See continuity check.
CDVT
cell delay variation tolerance
CE
See customer edge.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

276

Transmission System
A Glossary
CES
See circuit emulation service.
CFM
connectivity fault management
CFR
cell fill rate
CGMP
Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR
committed information rate
CISPR
International Special Committee on Radio Interference
CIST
See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLEI
common language equipment identification
CLNP
connectionless network protocol
CLP
See cell loss priority.
CMI
coded mark inversion
CRC
See cyclic redundancy check.
CRC-4 multiframe
A multiframe recommended by ITU-T G.704 and set up based on the first bit of
timeslot 0. The CRC-4 multiframe is different from the CAS multiframe in
principle and implementation. Each CRC-4 multiframe contains 16 PCM
frames. Each CRC-4 multiframe consists of two CRC-4 sub-multiframes. Each
CRC-4 sub-multiframe is a CRC-4 check block that contains 2048 (256 x 8) bits.
Bits C1 to C4 of a check block can check the previous check block.
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CSES
consecutive severely errored second
CSF
Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD
See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CSPF
constraint shortest path first
CST
See common spanning tree.
CV
connectivity verification
CW
control word
CWDM
See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CIST)
The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical
connectivity using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that
all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC)
The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully

maintained atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds
worldwide.
carrier sense multiple

access with collision
detection (CSMA/CD)
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer

networking access method in which:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
A carrier sensing scheme is used.
A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a

frame, stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits

277

Transmission System
A Glossary
for a random time interval before trying to send that frame again.
cell loss priority (CLP)
A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being
dropped if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured
traffic, which is unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort
traffic, which might be dropped.
channel associated
signaling (CAS)
A signaling system in which signaling information is transmitted within a

dedicated voice channel. China Signaling System No. 1 is a type of CAS
signaling.
circuit emulation service

(CES)
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM
networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into
ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM
network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these
ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in
E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.
client automatic upgrade

(CAU)
A function that enables a user to automatically detect the update of the client
version and upgrade the client. This keeps the version of the client is the same as
that of the server.
coarse wavelength division

multiplexing (CWDM)
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical

channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of
several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in
short-distance chain networking.
collision
A condition in which two packets are being transmitted over a medium at the
same time. Their interference makes both unintelligible.
committed burst size

(CBS)
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum
burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that
this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that
might be forwarded.
common spanning tree

(CST)
A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every
MST region is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as
their spanning tree generated with STP/RSTP.
constant bit rate (CBR)
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells
based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that
depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check (CC)
Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is
achieved after MEPs transmit Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) periodically.
customer edge (CE)
A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection

to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
cyclic redundancy check

(CRC)
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error

checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data
transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission
and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving
device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the
same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is
known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data
but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

278

Transmission System
A Glossary
D
DC
direct current
DC-C
See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I
See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common (with

ground) (DC-C)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is

short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet
and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the
electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with

ground) (DC-I)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is

short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet
and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power
supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC
See data communications channel.
DCE
data connection equipment
DCM
See dispersion compensation module.
DCN
See data communication network.
DDF
digital distribution frame
DDN
See digital data network.
DE
discard eligible
DEI
device emulation interrupt
DHCP
See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DIP switch
dual in-line package switch
DLAG
See distributed link aggregation group.
DM
See delay measurement.
DNI
dual node interconnection
DRDB
dynamic random database
DSCP
See differentiated services code point.
DSL
See digital subscriber line.
DSLAM
See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DTE
See data terminal equipment.
DTMF
See dual tone multiple frequency.
DVB-ASI
digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP
See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM
See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

279

Transmission System
A Glossary
DiffServ
See Differentiated Services.
Differentiated Services
(DiffServ)
An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding

traffic in a differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network
congestion.
Distance Vector Multicast

Routing Protocol
(DVMRP)
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements
a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to
exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration

parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the host to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides
a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
data communication
network (DCN)
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data

communication function.
data communications
channel (DCC)
The data channel that uses the D1D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N
signal to transmit information about operation, management, maintenance and
provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of
bytes D1D3 are referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC
channels that are composed of bytes D4D12 are referred to as the 576 kbit/s
DCC-M channel.
data terminal equipment

(DTE)
A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through
the DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals
produced by DCE.
delay measurement (DM)
The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a
source node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the
same source node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination
node.
dense wavelength division

multiplexing (DWDM)
The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low
attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with
specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit
simultaneously in the same fiber.
differentiated services
code point (DSCP)
According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service

(Diff-Serv), the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most
significant bits and two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for
priority marking. Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most
important bits in the ToS. It is the combination of IP precedence and types of
service. The DSCP value is used to ensure that routers supporting only IP
precedence can be used because the DSCP value is compatible with IP
precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB). Therefore, terminal
devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital data network

(DDN)
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as
fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross
multiplex technology.
digital subscriber line

(DSL)
A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the local
telephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines
without affecting the POTS service.

access multiplexer
A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company

that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

280

Transmission System
A Glossary
(DSLAM)
connections and puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using

multiplexing techniques.
dispersion
The maximum error of the local clock compared with the reference clock.
dispersion compensation
module (DCM)
A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the

dispersion of transmitting fiber.
distributed link
aggregation group
(DLAG)
A board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts

and to negotiate with the opposite end. Once a link down failure occurs on a port
or a hardware failure occurs on a board, the services can automatically be
switched to the slave board, achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
dual tone multiple

frequency (DTMF)
In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set

combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four
low frequencies and the other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used.
E
E-Aggr
See Ethernet aggregation.
E-LAN
See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line
See Ethernet line.
EBS
See excess burst size.
ECC
See embedded control channel.
EDFA
See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EEPROM
See electrically erasable programable read-only memory.
EF
See expedited forwarding.
EFM
Ethernet in the First Mile
EFM OAM
Ethernet in the first mile OAM
EIA
See Electronic Industries Alliance.
EIR
See excess information rate.
EMC
See electromagnetic compatibility.
EPD
early packet discard
EPL
See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN
See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPON
See Ethernet passive optical network.
ERPS
Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC
See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON
See enterprise system connection.
ESD
electrostatic discharge
ESN
See equipment serial number.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

281

Transmission System
A Glossary
ETS
European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI
See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVC
Ethernet virtual connection
EVPL
See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN
See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
Electronic Industries
Alliance (EIA)
An association based in Washington, D.C., with members from various

electronics manufacturers. It sets standards for electronic components.
RS-232-C, for example, is the EIA standard for connecting serial components.
EoD
See Ethernet over dual domains.
Ethernet
A LAN technology that uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection.

The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or
10000 Mbit/s. An Ethernet network features high reliability and is easy to
maintain.
Ethernet aggregation
(E-Aggr)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet

virtual connection).
Ethernet line (E-Line)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet

virtual connection).
Ethernet local area

network (E-LAN)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC

(Ethernet virtual connection).
Ethernet over dual

domains (EoD)
A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling
Ethernet service transmission across PSN and TDM networks.
Ethernet passive optical

network (EPON)
A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband

access technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber
transmission. It supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s
and a reach distance of up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth
is shared based on encrypted broadcast transmission for different users. In the
upstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on TDM. EPON meets the
requirements for high bandwidth.
Ethernet private LAN

service (EPLAN)
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks.

This service is carried over a dedicated bridge and point-to-multipoint
connections.
Ethernet private line

(EPL)
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and

point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
network.
Ethernet virtual private

LAN service (EVPLAN)

This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual private

line (EVPL)

This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-point connections.
European
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for

GSM.
eSFP
enhanced small form-factor pluggable
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

282

Transmission System
A Glossary
electric supervisory
channel (ESC)
A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and

transmission of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The
monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is
transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable
programable read-only
memory (EEPROM)
A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for
stable storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing
reprograming. EEPROMs contain less memory than RAM, take longer to
reprogram, and can be reprogramed only a limited number of times before
wearing out.
electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing

its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment
without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same
environment.
embedded control channel

(ECC)
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical
layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance
(OAM) information between NEs.
encapsulation
A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a

message from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the
lower-level frame. Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and
are carried by protocol B as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B
header, an A header, followed by the information that protocol A is carrying.
Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside IP.
enterprise system
connection (ESCON)
A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage
system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is
200 Mbit/s.
equalization
A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can

compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency
selective fading.
equipment serial number

(ESN)
A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct

allocation of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called
"equipment fingerprint".
erbium-doped fiber
amplifier (EDFA)
An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short
length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy
level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier
passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a
specific wavelength range.
excess burst size (EBS)
A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM)
mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst
size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the
maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the
committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is
recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of
the IP packet that might be forwarded.
excess information rate

(EIR)
The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result
of the actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
exercise switching
An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

283

Transmission System
A Glossary
properly. The protection switching is not really performed.

expedited forwarding (EF)
The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services
that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the
cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set
rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".
F
FC
See fiber channel.
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
FDD
See frequency division duplex.
FDDI
See fiber distributed data interface.
FDI
See forward defect indication.
FDI packet
See forward defect indication packet.
FDV
See frame delay variation.
FEC
See forwarding equivalence class.
FFD
fast failure detection
FIB
See forward information base.
FICON
See Fiber Connect.
FIFO
See first in first out.
FLR
See frame loss ratio.
FPGA
See field programmable gate array.
FPS
See fast protection switching.
FRR
See fast reroute.
FTN
FEC to NHLFE
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
Fiber Connect (FICON)
A new generation connection protocol which connects the host to various

control units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path
of fiber channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
fast protection switching

(FPS)
A type of pseudo wire automatic protection switching (PW APS). When the
working PW is faulty, the source transmits services to the protection PW and the
sink receives the services from the protection PW. FPS generally works with the
interworking function (IWF) to provide end-to-end protection for services.
fast reroute (FRR)
A technology which provides a temporary protection of link availability when

part of a network fails. The protocol enables the creation of a standby route or
path for an active route or path. When the active route is unavailable, the traffic
on the active route can be switched to the standby route. When the active route is
recovered, the traffic can be switched back to the active route. FRR is
categorized into IP FRR, VPN FRR, and TE FRR.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

284

Transmission System
A Glossary
fiber channel (FC)
A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs).

Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is
primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber
channel supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel
signaling can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber
channel provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
fiber distributed data

interface (FDDI)
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for

high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides
specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per
second on networks based on the token ring network.
field programmable gate

array (FPGA)
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the application specific integrated

circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable
components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects
of customized circuits but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original
programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays.
first in first out (FIFO)
A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
forward defect indication

(FDI)
A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node
that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and
its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected
higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward defect indication

packet (FDI packet)
A packet that responds to the detected failure event. It is used to suppress alarms
of the upper layer network where failure has occurred.
forward information base

(FIB)
A table that provides information for network hardware (bridges and routers) for
them to forward data packets to other networks. The information contained in a
routing table differs according to whether it is used by a bridge or a router. A
bridge relies on both the source (originating) and destination addresses to
determine where and how to forward a packet.
forwarding equivalence
class (FEC)
A class-based forwarding technology that classifies the packets with the same
forwarding mode. Packets with the same FEC are processed similarly on an
MPLS network. The division of FECs is flexible, and can be a combination of
the source address, destination address, source port, destination port, protocol
type, and VPN.
frame delay variation

(FDV)
A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service

frames, where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to
point ETH connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR)
A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not

delivered divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T,
where the number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the
number of service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number
of service frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH
connection.
frequency division duplex

(FDD)
An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system,

the uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through
bursts. Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time
length.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

285

Transmission System
A Glossary
G
G-ACH
generic associated channel header
GAL
generic associated channel header label
GCC
general communication channel
GCP
GMPLS control plan
GCRA
generic cell rate algorithm
GFC
generic flow control
GFP
See Generic Framing Procedure.
GMPLS
generalized multiprotocol label switching
GNE
See gateway network element.
GPON
gigabit-capable passive optical network
GPS
See Global Positioning System.
GRE
See Generic Routing Encapsulation.
GSM
See Global System for Mobile Communications.
Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP)
A framing and encapsulation method which can be applied to any data type. It
has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.
Generic Routing
Encapsulation (GRE)
A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other
network. GRE is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the
Internet. GRE serves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for
transparently transmitting data packets.
Global Positioning System

(GPS)
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation,

and timing services to worldwide users.
Global System for Mobile

Communications (GSM)
The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European

Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a
standard for global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to
use a phone globally. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching
subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gain
The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the
optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the
jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.
gateway network element

(GNE)
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application

layer and the NM application layer.
H
HCS
higher order connection supervision
HD
high definition
HD-SDI
See high definition-serial digital interface signal.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

286

Transmission System
A Glossary
HDB3
See high density bipolar of order 3 code.
HDLC
High-Level Data Link Control
HDTV
See high definition television.
HEC
See header error control.
HPA
high order path adaptation
HPT
higher order path termination
HQoS
See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA
See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSI
high-speed Internet
HSL
See high-level script language.
High Speed Downlink

Packet Access (HSDPA)
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the

requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services.
It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without
changing the WCDMA network topology.
header error control

(HEC)
A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in
the cell Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a
CRC check in the first four header bits and also at the receiving end.
hierarchical quality of
service (HQoS)
A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling
according to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics
function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each
service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic
analysis.
high definition television

(HDTV)
A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080

interlaced active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using
at least 540 progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
high definition-serial
digital interface signal
(HD-SDI)
High definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
high density bipolar of

order 3 code (HDB3)
A code used for baseband transmissions between telecommunications devices.

The HDB3 code has the following feature: high capability of clock extraction,
no direct current component, error-checking capability, and a maximum of three
consecutive zeros.
high-level script language

(HSL)
A script language. Based on python, the HSL syntax is simple, clear, and
extendable.
hot patch
A patch that is used to repair a deficiency in the software or add a new feature to
a program without restarting the software and interrupting the service. For the
equipment using the built-in system, a hot patch can be loaded, activated,
confirmed, deactivated, deleted, or queried.
I
IAE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
incoming alignment error

287

Transmission System
A Glossary
IANA
See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC
See integrated circuit.
ICC
See ITU carrier code.
ICMP
See Internet Control Message Protocol.
ICP
IMA Control Protocol
IEEE
See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF
See Internet Engineering Task Force.
IF
See intermediate frequency.
IGMP
See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGMP snooping
A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol

manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet
Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3
devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can
be prevented efficiently.
IGP
See Interior Gateway Protocol.
ILM
incoming label map
IMA
See inverse multiplexing over ATM.
IN
intelligent network
IP
Internet Protocol
IPA
See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV
See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4
See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6
See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS
See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISDN
integrated services digital network
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
ISP
See Internet service provider.
IST
internal spanning tree
ITC
independent transmit clock
ITU
See International Telecommunication Union.
ITU carrier code (ICC)
A code assigned to a network operator/service provider, maintained by the

ITU-T Telecommunication Standardization Bureau (TSB).
ITU-T
See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication

Standardization Sector.
Institute of Electrical and

Electronics Engineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States

but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

288

Transmission System
A Glossary
(IEEE)
electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
Interior Gateway Protocol

(IGP)
A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in
small-sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the
routing information protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol
(IGRP), the enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
Intermediate System to
Intermediate System
(IS-IS)
A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to

forward datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
International
Telecommunication Union
(ITU)
A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential

recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for
telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R).
International
Telecommunication
Union-Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
(ITU-T)
An international body that develops worldwide standards for

telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series
which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number
specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series
which deals with data networks and open system communications and number
"25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority
(IANA)
A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP

address-space allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other
organizations. IANA also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers
used in the TCP/IP suite, including autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control Message

Protocol (ICMP)
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error

correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example,
it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an
unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI
reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering Task

Force (IETF)
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the

Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF
is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing
solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is
carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics such as
routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to
the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
(IGMP)
One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol
multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
television (IPTV)
A system in which video is transmitted in IP packets. Also called "TV over IP",
IPTV uses streaming video techniques to deliver scheduled TV programs or
video-on-demand (VOD). Unlike transmitting over the air or through cable to a
TV set, IPTV uses the transport protocol of the Internet for delivery and requires
either a computer and software media player or an IPTV set-top box to decode
the images in real time.
Internet Protocol version

4 (IPv4)
The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address
which is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C,
D, or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from
0.0.0.0 through to 255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network
number, an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and
subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, and the host number is used
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

289

Transmission System
A Glossary
to address an individual host within the network or subnetwork.

Internet Protocol version
6 (IPv6)
An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task

Force (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of
the Internet Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4
address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet service provider

(ISP)
An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
integrated circuit (IC)
A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in

place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a
microcircuit function.
intelligent power
adjustment (IPA)
A mechanism used to reduce the optical power of all the amplifiers in an

adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system
detects the loss of optical signals on the link. If the fiber is broken, the device
performance degrades, or the connector is not plugged well, the loss of optical
signals may occur. With IPA, maintenance engineers will not be hurt by the
laser sent out from the slice of broken fiber.
intermediate frequency
(IF)
The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an

RF signal.
inverse multiplexing over

ATM (IMA)
A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM

cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth
logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.
L
L2VPN
Layer 2 virtual private network
L3VPN
Layer 3 virtual private network
LACP
See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU
Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG
See link aggregation group.
LAN
See local area network.
LAPD
link access procedure on the D channel
LAPS
Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB
local battery
LC
Lucent connector
LCAS
See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCK
See Locked signal function.
LCN
local communications network
LDP
Label Distribution Protocol
LED
See light emitting diode.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

290

Transmission System
A Glossary
LER
See label edge router.
LIFO
See last in first out.
LLC
See logical link control.
LLID
local loopback ID
LM
See loss measurement.
LMP
link management protocol
LOC
loss of clock
LOM
loss of multiframe
LOP
loss of pointer
LOS
See loss of signal.
LPA
low order path adaptation
LPT
link-state pass through
LSP
See label switched path.
LSR
See label switching router.
LT
linktrace
LVDS
See low voltage differential signal.
Layer 2 switching
A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch

transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC
address is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is
called Layer 2 switching.
Link Aggregation Control

Protocol (LACP)
A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of
their parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link
is formed, LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts
the ports on the aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
Locked signal function

(LCK)
A function administratively locks an MEG end point (MEP) at the server layer,
informs consequential data traffic interruption to the peer MEP at the client
layer, and suppresses the alarm at the client layer.
label edge router (LER)
A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information
to assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label switched path (LSP)
A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through

label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically,
based on common routing mechanisms or through configuration.
label switching router

(LSR)
Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The
LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is
responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label
forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter
forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.
last in first out (LIFO)
A play mode of the voice mails, the last voice mail is played firstly.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

291

Transmission System
A Glossary
light emitting diode (LED)
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic
product on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights,
traffic lights and perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in
multimode fibers, optical mice and laser-class printers.
linear MSP
linear multiplex section protection
link aggregation group

(LAG)
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a

link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group
as if it were a single link.
link capacity adjustment

scheme (LCAS)
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides
a control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet
the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing
member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of
capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the
end-to-end path is the responsibility of the network and element management
systems.
local area network (LAN)
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a

few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low
error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to
implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or
Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
logical link control (LLC)
According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is
the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the
various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
loss measurement (LM)
A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service
frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data
frames between a pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS)
No transitions occurring in the received signal.
low voltage differential

signal (LVDS)
A low noise, low power, low amplitude method for high-speed (gigabits per
second) data transmission over copper wire.
M
MA
maintenance association
MAC
See Media Access Control.
MADM
multiple add/drop multiplexer
MAN
See metropolitan area network.
MBS
maximum burst size
MCF
message communication function
MCR
minimum cell rate
MD
See maintenance domain.
MDF
See main distribution frame.
MDP
message dispatch process
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

292

Transmission System
A Glossary
MDU
See multi-dwelling unit.
ME
See maintenance entity.
MEG
See maintenance entity group.
MEL
maintenance entity group level
MEP
maintenance end point
MFAS
See multiframe alignment signal.
MIB
See management information base.
MIP
maintenance intermediate point
MLD
See multicast listener discovery.
MP
maintenance point
MPLS
See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE
multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS TP
See Multiprotocol Label Switching traffic policing.
MPLS VPN
See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MPLS-TP
See multiprotocol label switching transport profile.
MS
multiplex section
MSA
multiplex section adaptation
MSB
most significant bit
MSOH
multiplex section overhead
MSP
See multiplex section protection.
MST
See multiplex section termination.
MSTI
See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP
See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF
See mean time between failures.
MTTR
See mean time to repair.
MTU
See maximum transmission unit.
MUX
See multiplexer.
Media Access Control

(MAC)
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part
of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling
and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data,
the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be
transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data
and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical
layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is
correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct
and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the
data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

293

Transmission System
A Glossary
Multiple Spanning Tree

Protocol (MSTP)
A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP
blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree
network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs
and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be
normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree
corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS)
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in

different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network
layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost
performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching traffic policing
(MPLS TP)
It is a scheme that supervises the specific traffic entering the communication

devices. By policing the speed of traffic that enters the network, it "punishes" the
traffic out of the threshold, so the traffic going into network is limited to a
reasonable range, protecting the network resources and the interests of the
carriers.
main distribution frame

(MDF)
A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
maintenance domain
(MD)
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by
connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain
are managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity (ME)
An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two

ends of a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs)
on the trail.
maintenance entity group

(MEG)
A MEG consists of MEs that meet the following criteria:
Exist within the same management edges.
Have the same MEG hierarchy.
Belong to the same P2P or P2MP connection.
management information
base (MIB)
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network.

It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage
entities (such as routers and switches) in a network.
maximum transmission
unit (MTU)
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size
varies, depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example,
1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring.
Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the
network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or
PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can
transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved.
mean time between

failures (MTBF)
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a

measure of the reliability of the system.
mean time to repair

(MTTR)
The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
metropolitan area
network (MAN)
A network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area

or region larger than that covered by even a large LAN but smaller than the area
covered by an WAN. The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a
city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection
to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

294

Transmission System
A Glossary
local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is
also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
mirror
An action to store a copy of a file to another archive site to release the load of
the original site, or to provide an archive site closer to the users geographically.
mirroring
The duplication of data for backup or to distribute network traffic among several
computers with identical data.
multi-dwelling unit
(MDU)
A network access unit used for multi-dwelling units. It provides Ethernet and IP
services and optionally VoIP or CATV services; has multiple broadband
interfaces on the user side and optionally POTS ports or CATV RF ports. It is
mainly applicable to FTTB, FTTC, or FTTCab networks.
multicast listener
discovery (MLD)
A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their

directly connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member
relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts
and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can
dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members
on the local network.
multiframe alignment
signal (MFAS)
A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes,

always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to
establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree

instance (MSTI)
A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide

a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging
to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN
cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section
protection (MSP)
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal

between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from
a "working" to a "protection" channel.
multiplex section
termination (MST)
A function, which is performed to generate the MSOH during the process of

forming an SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
multiplexer (MUX)
Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number

of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and
aggregate channels being fixed.
multiprotocol label
switching transport
profile (MPLS-TP)
A packet transport technology proposed by IETF that combines the packet

experience of MPLS with the operational experience of transport networks.
multiprotocol label
switching virtual private
network (MPLS VPN)
An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the

multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS
technology for network routers and switches, simplifies the routing mode of core
routers, and combines traditional routing technology and label switching
technology. It can be used to construct the broadband Intranet and Extranet to
meet various service requirements.
N
NAS
network access server
NDF
new data flag
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

295

Transmission System
A Glossary
NHLFE
next hop label forwarding entry
NMC
network management center
NNI
network-to-network interface
NPC
See network parameter control.
NPE
network provider edge
NRT-VBR
non-real-time variable bit rate
NRZ
non-return to zero
NRZI
non-return to zero inverted
NSAP
See network service access point.
NSF
non-stop forwarding
NTP
Network Time Protocol
network parameter
control (NPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on

each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is
exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function.
The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into
UPC and NPC according to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network
interface, while NPC at the network interface.
network service access

point (NSAP)
A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made
available to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
O
O&M
operation and maintenance
OA
optical amplifier
OADM
See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM
See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU
operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OAU
See optical amplifier unit.
OC
ordinary clock
OCP
optical channel protection
OCS
optical core switching
ODF
optical distribution frame
ODU
See outdoor unit.
OLT
optical line terminal
ONT
See optical network terminal.
ONU
See optical network unit.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

296

Transmission System
A Glossary
OPEX
operating expense
OPU
optical channel payload unit
OSC
See optical supervisory channel.
OSI
See open systems interconnection.
OSN
optical switch node
OSNR
See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF
See Open Shortest Path First.
OTDR
See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTM
optical terminal multiplexer
OTN
optical transport network
OTU
See optical transponder unit.
OTUk
optical channel transport unit-k
Open Shortest Path First

(OSPF)
A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing.

Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its
routing metric. A link state database is constructed with the network topology
which is identical on all routers in the area.
open systems
interconnection (OSI)
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems

made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized
into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on
their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and
provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end
communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3
through 1 deal with network functions.
operation, administration
and maintenance (OAM)
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment

operation, support activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure
detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults
and keep a segment in an operational state, and support activities required to
provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.
optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM)
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to
one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one
channel.
optical amplifier unit

(OAU)
A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can
be used in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction.
optical network terminal

(ONT)
A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.
optical network unit

(ONU)
A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to
electrical signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper
wiring to individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR)
The ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the
most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. OSNR
= signal power/noise power.
optical supervisory
A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

297

Transmission System
A Glossary
channel (OSC)
among nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data
in a certain channel.
optical time domain

reflectometer (OTDR)
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication
system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber
length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault.
optical transponder unit

(OTU)
A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the
G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire
A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or

maintenance engineers of different stations.
outdoor unit (ODU)
The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements

frequency conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.
P
P2MP
point-to-multipoint
P2P
See point-to-point service.
PADR
PPPoE active discovery request
PBS
See peak burst size.
PCB
See printed circuit board.
PCM
See pulse code modulation.
PCR
See peak cell rate.
PDH
See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU
See power distribution unit.
PE
See provider edge.
PHB
See per-hop behavior.
PHP
penultimate hop popping
PIM-DM
Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM
Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PIR
peak information rate
PLL
See phase-locked loop.
PM
performance monitoring
PMS
Product Management System
POH
path overhead
PON
passive optical network
POS
See packet over SDH/SONET.
PPD
partial packet discard
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

298

Transmission System
A Glossary
PPI
PDH physical interface
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PPS
port protection switching
PQ
See priority queuing.
PRBS
See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC
primary reference clock
PRI
primary rate interface
PSD
See power spectrum density.
PSN
See packet switched network.
PSTN
See public switched telephone network.
PSU
power supply unit
PT
payload type
PTI
payload type indicator
PTN
packet transport network
PTP
See point to point.
PVID
See port default VLAN ID.
PVP
See permanent virtual path.
PW
See pseudo wire.
PWE3
See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
packet over SDH/SONET

(POS)
A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections.

The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and
supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
packet switched network

(PSN)
A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
packet switching
A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of

exchanging packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple
connections.
parity check
A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of
bits, usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or
even (odd or even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same
parity. When the transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of
1s in the frame and attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the
1s and, if there is parity error, may ask for the data to be retransmitted.
peak burst size (PBS)
A parameter that is used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the
maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that
PBS should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded. See also CIR, CBS, and PIR.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

299

Transmission System
A Glossary
peak cell rate (PCR)
The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells.
per-hop behavior (PHB)
IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as

per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in
the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of
DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector
(CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
permanent virtual path

(PVP)
Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
phase-locked loop (PLL)
A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the

frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier
signal or reference-frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after
passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to
keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency.
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy (PDH)
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the

minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s
rates.
point to point (PTP)
A type of service in which data is sent from a single network termination to

another network termination.
point-to-point service
(P2P)
A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients
are terminal users.
port default VLAN ID

(PVID)
A default VLAN ID of a port. It is allocated to a data frame if the data frame

carries no VLAN tag when reaching the port.
power distribution unit

(PDU)
A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
power spectrum density

(PSD)
The power layout of random signals in the frequency domain.
printed circuit board

(PCB)
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic

components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper
sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.
priority queuing (PQ)
A queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority. According to the

PQ algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater bandwidth,
lower latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent till
all packets of higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher
priorities are processed earlier than others.
provider edge (PE)
A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A
PE is responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and
exchanging routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs
the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the
public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary

sequence (PRBS)
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent

of the values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire (PW)
An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is

established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status
information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation
An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

300

Transmission System
A Glossary
edge-to-edge (PWE3)
attributes of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a

packet switched network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of
low speed time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The
simulation approximates to the real situation.
public switched telephone

network (PSTN)
A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the

public subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
pulse code modulation

(PCM)
A method of encoding information in a signal by changing the amplitude of

pulses. Unlike pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), in which pulse amplitude can
change continuously, pulse code modulation limits pulse amplitudes to several
predefined values. Because the signal is discrete, or digital, rather than analog,
pulse code modulation is more immune to noise than PAM.
Q
QAM
See quadrature amplitude modulation.
QPSK
See quadrature phase shift keying.
QinQ
See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.
QoS
See quality of service.
quadrature amplitude
modulation (QAM)
Both an analog and a digital modulation scheme. It conveys two analog message
signals, or two digital bit streams, by changing (modulating) the amplitudes of
two carrier waves, using the amplitude-shift keying (ASK) digital modulation
scheme or amplitude modulation (AM) analog modulation scheme. These two
waves, usually sinusoids, are out of phase with each other by 90 and are thus
called quadrature carriers or quadrature components hence the name of the
scheme.
quadrature phase shift

keying (QPSK)
A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation

and the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the
fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star
diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each
QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code
on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service (QoS)
A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or

channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter,
delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to
measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the
services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of
users.
R
RADIUS
See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RAN
See radio access network.
RDI
remote defect indication
RED
See random early detection.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

301

Transmission System
A Glossary
REG
See regenerator.
REI
remote error indication
RIP
See Routing Information Protocol.
RMEP
remote maintenance association end point
RMON
remote network monitoring
RNC
See radio network controller.
ROPA
See remote optical pumping amplifier.
RPR
resilient packet ring
RSOH
regenerator section overhead
RST
regenerator section termination
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP
See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RSVP-TE
See Resource ReserVation Protocol-Traffic Engineering.
RTN
radio transmission node
RTP
real-time performance
RTS
request to send
Rapid Spanning Tree

Protocol (RSTP)
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward
compatible with the STP protocol.
Remote Authentication
Dial In User Service
(RADIUS)
A networking protocol that provides centralized Authentication, Authorization,

and Accounting (AAA) management for computers to connect and use a
network service.
Resource ReserVation
Protocol-Traffic
Engineering (RSVP-TE)
An extension to the RSVP protocol for setting up label switched paths (LSPs) in
MPLS networks. The RSVP-TE protocol is used to establish and maintain the
LSPs by initiating label requests and allocating label binding messages. It also
supports LSP rerouting and LSP bandwidth increasing.
Resource Reservation
Protocol (RSVP)
A network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) and
designed for Integrated Service and used to reserve resources on every node
along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not
transport application data.
RoHS
restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
Routing Information
Protocol (RIP)
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines
a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a
distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its
neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio access network

(RAN)
The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates
the CN from wireless network.
radio network controller

(RNC)
A piece of equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and
the integrity of the radio resources.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

302

Transmission System
A Glossary
random early detection

(RED)
A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet

according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global
TCP synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
real-time variable bit rate

(rt-VBR)
A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over

IP (VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell
rate (PCR), sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can
expect the source device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
receiver sensitivity
The minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve

a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
reflectance
The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.
regenerator (REG)
A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
remote optical pumping

amplifier (ROPA)
A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power

supply and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a
power compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP)
transmission.
rt-VBR
See real-time variable bit rate.
S
SAI
service area identifier
SAN
storage area network
SAToP
Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SC
square connector
SCR
sustainable cell rate
SD
See signal degrade.
SD-SDI
See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH
See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDI
See serial digital interface.
SDP
serious disturbance period
SDRAM
See synchronous dynamic random access memory.
SELV
safety extra-low voltage
SEMF
synchronous equipment management function
SES
severely errored second
SF
See signal fail.
SFP
SFTP
See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL
See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

303

Transmission System
A Glossary
SLA
See service level agreement.
SLIP
See Serial Line Interface Protocol.
SMB
Server Message Block
SMSR
side mode suppression ratio
SNCMP
subnetwork connection multipath protection
SNCP
subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP
subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SOH
section overhead
SONET
See synchronous optical network.
SP
See service provider.
SPC
soft permanent connection
SPE
See superstratum provider edge.
SPI
SDH physical interface
SRG
See shared risk group.
SRLG
shared risk link group
SSH
See Secure Shell.
SSL
See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM
See Synchronization Status Message.
SSMB
synchronization status message byte
SSU
synchronization supply unit
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
Secure File Transfer

Protocol (SFTP)
A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Secure Shell (SSH)
A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a

secure channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect
information and provide powerful authentication function for a network when a
user logs in to the network through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses
from being deceived and plain text passwords from being captured.
Secure Sockets Layer

(SSL)
A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the
TCP layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate
concerned entities.
Serial Line Interface

Protocol (SLIP)
A protocol that defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement
transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host
interconnection function with a known IP address.
Simple Network
Management Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and

modify the management information of a network element. This protocol
ensures the transmission of management information between any two points.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

304

Transmission System
A Glossary
(SNMP)
The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to

SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the
activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the
network console workstation. Control information about each device is
maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status
Message (SSM)
A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing

link. Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire
upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform
proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to
holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes.
serial digital interface

(SDI)
An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
service level agreement

(SLA)
A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies

the service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source
domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning
agreement as a whole or partially.
service provider (SP)
An entity that offers service subscriptions to individual subscribers and contracts

with carriers to implement services for a specific DN. A service provider may
contract with more than one carrier.
shared risk group (SRG)
A group of resources that share a common risk component whose failure can
cause the failure of all the resources in the group.
signal degrade (SD)
A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded
defect condition is active.
signal fail (SF)
A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end
defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
single-pair high-speed
(SHDSL)
A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL,

and HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected
to the user terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis
coded pulse amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed
data and provide the broadband access service.
span
The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of
spans determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of
equipment and varies according to transmission system type.
standard definition-serial
digital interface signal
(SD-SDI)
Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
superstratum provider
edge (SPE)
Core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network. The UPE
devices that are connected with the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices.
The PWs set up between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs
of the SPE devices. The SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the
sites on UPE side and those of the UPE interfaces that are connected with the
SPE. SPE is sometimes called NPE.
synchronous digital
hierarchy (SDH)
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines
the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing
mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of
ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

305

Transmission System
A Glossary
signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used

only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high
speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible
mapping structure.
synchronous dynamic
random access memory
(SDRAM)
A new type of DRAM that can run at much higher clock speeds than
conventional memory. SDRAM actually synchronizes itself with the CPU's bus
and is capable of running at 100 MHz, about three times faster than conventional
FPM RAM, and about twice as fast as EDO DRAM or BEDO DRAM. SDRAM
is replacing EDO DRAM in computers.
synchronous optical
network (SONET)
A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications

carriers to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to
handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of
51.84 Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
T
TCI
tag control information
TCM
See trellis coded modulation scheme.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDC
tunable dispersion compensator
TDM
See time division multiplexing.
TE
See traffic engineering.
TFTP
See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
TIM
trail trace identifier mismatch
TLV
See type-length-value.
TM
See terminal multiplexer.
TMN
See telecommunications management network.
TOD
time of day
TPID
tag protocol identifier
TPS
See tributary protection switching.
TST
See Test.
TTI
trail trace identifier
TTSI
See trail termination source identifier.
TUG
tributary unit group
Telnet
A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet

allows users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were
connected to a local system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
Test (TST)
A function which is used to perform one-way on-demand in-service or

out-of-service diagnostics tests. This includes verifying bandwidth throughput,
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

306

Transmission System
A Glossary
frame loss, bit errors, and so on.

Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP)
A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server.
TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide
authentication. TFTP is small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for
bootstrapping diskless machines.
tail drop
A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are

discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in
network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
telecommunications
management network
(TMN)
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a

communications network. An architecture for management, including planning,
provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of
telecommunications equipment, networks and services.
terminal multiplexer (TM)
A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate

signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of
high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.
throughput
The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment,

connection, service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be
measured with bandwidth.
time division multiplexing

(TDM)
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into

time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple
signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing
digital signals to be transmitted over one channel.
traceroute
A program that prints the path to a destination. Traceroute sends a sequence of

datagrams with the time-to-live (TTL) set to 1,2, and so on, and uses ICMP time
exceeded messages that return to determine routers along the path.
traffic engineering (TE)
A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and
the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as
traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction
parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is
to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads.
trail termination source

identifier (TTSI)
A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the

connectivity verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If
it matches the TTSI received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity
defect.
trellis coded modulation

scheme (TCM)
A modulation scheme which allows highly efficient transmission of information

over band-limited channels such as telephone lines.
tributary protection
switching (TPS)
A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary

processing boards.
tunnel
A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between
PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two
entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN
information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
type-length-value (TLV)
An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called
Code-Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined
through different values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V
indicates the actual data of the TLV and is most important. TLV encoding
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

307

Transmission System
A Glossary
features high expansibility. New TLVs can be added to support new features,
which is flexible in describing information loaded in packets.
U
UART
universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UAS
unavailable second
UAT
See unavailable time event.
UBR
unspecified bit rate
UBR+
Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol.
UNI
See user-to-network interface.
UPC
See usage parameter control.
UPE
user-end provider edge
UPI
user payload identifier
UPM
uninterruptible power module
UPS
uninterruptible power supply
UTC
See Coordinated Universal Time.
User Datagram Protocol

(UDP)
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to

send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol
(UDP) uses IP to deliver datagram. UDP provides application programs with the
unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. There is a possibility that
UDP messages will be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. The
destination device does not confirm whether a data packet is received.
unavailable time event

(UAT)
An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive

severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the
unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better
than 10-3 within 10 consecutive seconds.
usage parameter control

(UPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on

each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is
exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function.
The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into
UPC and NPC according to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network
interface, while NPC at the network interface.
user-to-network interface
(UNI)
The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment
(for example, ATM switches).
V
V-NNI
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
virtual network-network interface

308

Transmission System
A Glossary
V-UNI
See virtual user-network interface.
VB
virtual bridge
VBR
See variable bit rate.
VCC
See virtual channel connection.
VCCV
virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG
See virtual concatenation group.
VCI
virtual channel identifier
VDSL
very-high-data-rate digital subscriber line
VDSL2
See very-high-speed digital subscriber line 2.
VLAN
virtual local area network
VOA
variable optical attenuator
VP
See virtual path.
VPI
See virtual path identifier.
VPLS
See virtual private LAN service.
VPN
virtual private network
VPWS
See virtual private wire service.
VRRP
See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI
See virtual switch instance.
Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol
(VRRP)
A protocol used for multicast or multicast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of

routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is
regarded as a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router
has its own IP address. The host in the network communicates with other
networks through this virtual router. If the active router in the backup group
fails, one of the backup routers in this backup group becomes active and
provides routing service for the host in the network.
VoIP
See voice over IP.
variable bit rate (VBR)
One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike
a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in
bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams
such as voice calls.
very-high-speed digital
subscriber line 2 (VDSL2)
An extension of the VDSL technology, which complies with ITU G.993.2,

supports multiple spectrum profiles and encapsulation modes, and provides
short-distance and high-speed access solutions to the next-generation FTTx
access service.
virtual channel connection

(VCC)
A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network.
A point-to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or
multiple end points.
virtual concatenation
group (VCG)
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to

the same virtual concatenation link
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

309

Transmission System
A Glossary
virtual path (VP)
A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an

ATM network based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier

(VPI)
The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies
to which virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN

service (VPLS)
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network.

VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other
through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private wire

service (VPWS)
A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as

ATM, FR, Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual switch instance

(VSI)
An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to
the virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has
Ethernet bridge function and can terminate PW.
virtual user-network
interface (V-UNI)
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service

classification and traffic control in HQoS.
voice over IP (VoIP)
An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a
digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional
circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
W
WAN
See wide area network.
WCDMA
See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM
wavelength division multiplexing
WEEE
waste electrical and electronic equipment
WFQ
See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN
See wireless local area network.
WRED
See weighted random early detection.
WRR
weighted round robin
WTR
See wait to restore.
Wideband Code Division

Multiple Access
(WCDMA)
A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology

derived from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
wait to restore (WTR)
The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working
line.
weighted fair queuing

(WFQ)
A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This

scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues,
according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner,
packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early

detection (WRED)
A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global
TCP synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

310

Transmission System
A Glossary
high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.

wide area network (WAN)
A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which
are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area,
such as a province, a state or even a country.
wireless local area

network (WLAN)
A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology.

It uses wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out
data interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the
traditional LAN.
Z
Z interface extension
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Extending the analogue subscriber to another place by extending the Z interface.

311

OptiX OSN 550 Hardware Description (V100R006)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 550 Hardware Description (V100R006)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

About This Document

About This Document

OptiX OSN 550

Network planning engineers

Hardware installation engineers

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

About This Document

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-01-18) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

Added EF8F boards' support for FE electrical ports.

Added the number of supported line clock sources to SDH boards.

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

Added the 1x10GE Ethernet processing board EX1.

Added the 4xchannelized STM-1 service processing board CQ1.

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

3 System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards...................................................................14

4 Packet Processing Boards...........................................................................................................65

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

4.1.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................74

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

4.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................131

5 SDH Boards................................................................................................................................ 138

6 PDH Boards................................................................................................................................ 162

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

6.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................168

7 EoS Boards.................................................................................................................................. 175

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

9 Auxiliary Boards........................................................................................................................ 196

11 Outdoor Cabinet...................................................................................................................... 222

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

12 Filler Panel................................................................................................................................ 225

15 Pluggable electrical Modules................................................................................................249

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

Chassis Structure and Board Installation Area

1 Power supply boards

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

Table 1-1 Description of labels

ESD protection label

Indicates that the equipment is

Indicates the grounding position

Fan warning label

Warns you not to touch fan